Technical information | Apple 12/600PS Printer User Manual


Apple
ColorLaserWriter
12/600PS
Setting up, connecting, and using your printer
K Apple Computer, Inc.
© 1995 Apple Computer, Inc. All rights reserved.
Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the
written consent of Apple. Your rights to the software are governed by the accompanying
software license agreement.
The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries. Use of the “keyboard” Apple logo (Option-Shift-K) for commercial purposes without
the prior written consent of Apple may constitute trademark infringement and unfair
competition in violation of federal and state laws.
Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Apple is
not responsible for printing or clerical errors.
Apple Computer, Inc.
1 Infinite Loop
Cupertino, CA 95014-2084
(408) 996-1010
Apple, the Apple logo, AppleTalk, A/UX, ColorSync, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, LocalTalk,
Macintosh, PowerBook, QuickTime, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Finder, QuickDraw, and QuickTake are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
Adobe, Adobe Illustrator, Adobe Photoshop, Adobe Type Manager, and PostScript are
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated, which may be registered in certain jurisdictions.
AIX and IBM are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
Classic is a registered trademark licensed to apple Computer, Inc. Helvetica, Palatino, and
Times are registered trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries.
ExposurePro is a registered trademark of Baseline Publishing.
ITC Avant Garde, ITC Bookman, ITC Zapf Chancery, and ITC Zapf Dingbats are registered
trademarks of International Typeface Corporation.
Lucida is a registered trademark of Bigelow and Holmes.
MS-DOS is a registered trademark and Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc.
QuarkXPress is a registered trademark of Quark, Inc.
Sun is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
SuperPaint is a trademark of Aldus Corporation, a subsidiary of Adobe Systems Incorporated,
which may be registered in certain jurisdictions.
Ultrix is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation.
UNIX is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc., in the U.S. and other countries, licensed
exclusively through X/Open Company, Ltd.
Simultaneously published in the United States and Canada.
Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an
endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the
performance or use of these products.
Contents Overview
Preface How Much of This Book Do I Have to Read?
xix
Part I Guide for Printer Administrators
1 Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
1
2 Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users
43
3 Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users
4 Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users
5 Installing Options
77
111
129
Part II Guide for Users
6 Macintosh Users
155
7 Windows and DOS Users
8 UNIX Users
9 Loading Paper
173
201
203
iii
10 Maintenance
215
11 Clearing Paper Jams
227
12 Fixing Image Problems
13 Troubleshooting
237
243
Part III Appendixes
A Technical Information and Printer Supplies
257
B Setting Up the Printer as an ATPS Remote Printer
C Using Fonts With the Printer
D Working With ColorSync
277
291
E Packing and Moving the Printer
F Replacing the Fuser
295
303
G Diagnosing Problems for Service
323
H Removing the Macintosh Desktop Printing Software
Index
iv
Contents
339
269
335
Detailed Contents
Communications regulation information
Laser information
xvii
xviii
Preface How Much of This Book Do I Have to Read?
xix
Printer administrators and users: Who does what
xix
What the printer administrator should know
Getting new users started
xx
xx
Which chapters should I read?
xxi
Part I Guide for Printer Administrators
1 Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
Main features of the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
Anatomy of the printer
1
2
Choosing a place for the printer
Important safety instructions
Unpacking the printer
1
3
4
6
Installing the quick reference booklet
Installing the fuser oil bottle
9
10
Installing the photoconductor cartridge and toner disposal box
Installing the toner cartridges
12
19
v
Wait to install the printer options
24
Loading paper into the paper cassette
Connecting the printer
25
29
Connecting to an Ethernet network
30
Connecting to a LocalTalk network
32
Connecting directly to a single Macintosh
34
Connecting to an IBM PC or compatible with a parallel cable
Connecting the power and turning on the printer
Saving energy
37
39
Adjusting communication settings
40
Why customize communication settings?
41
How to customize communication settings
How to return to the default settings
What to do next
41
42
42
2 Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users
Before you begin
43
44
Initial AppleTalk setup
44
Step 1: Installing the software the printer administrator needs
Step 2: Choosing the printer on the administrator’s computer
Step 3: Making sure everything is working
What to do next
48
48
Changing printer settings with the Apple Printer Utility
Opening the Apple Printer Utility
Viewing printer information
Naming the printer
51
53
53
Identifying the printer’s physical location
Sending fonts to the printer
vi
Contents
35
55
54
49
45
47
Removing fonts
57
Printing font samples
57
Initializing a hard disk connected to the printer
Turning the startup pages on or off
Conserving energy
59
60
Setting paper-handling options
Setting up job handling
61
62
Setting the printer’s error timeout
63
Setting the printer’s network zones
Viewing the Ethernet address
64
65
Working with a NetWare network
66
Changing TCP/IP configurations
68
Viewing and changing communication settings
Sending PostScript files to the printer
Restarting the printer
70
72
72
Getting Macintosh users started using the printer
Instructions for users
Software for users
58
73
73
73
Preparing a server so users can install over a network
Installing the printer software from the server
What to do next
74
75
76
Contents
vii
3 Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users
System requirements
Before you begin
77
77
78
Installing the software the printer administratror needs
Installing software for Windows NT
Using Apple Print Monitor
81
81
Initial Apple Print Monitor for Windows setup
Making sure everything is working
Initial Novell NetWare setup
82
83
83
Step 1: Choosing an operating mode
What to do next
78
84
85
Using PCONSOLE
86
Step 2, option A: Setting up the printer as a print server
(using PCONSOLE)
87
Step 2, option B: Setting up the printer as a remote printer
(RPRINTER mode)
92
Step 3: Assigning a password for the print server (optional)
97
Step 4: Setting up the PostScript printer driver for NetWare
98
Step 5: Making sure everything is working
98
Step 6: Setting up client computers for network printing
What to do next
98
98
Setting additional printer parameters with the Apple Printer Utility for
Windows
99
Installing the Apple Printer Utility for Windows
Opening and quitting the Apple Printer Utility
Selecting the printer
101
Viewing printer information
101
Giving the printer an AppleTalk name
Identifying the printer’s physical location
Printing font samples
viii
Contents
102
101
102
100
100
Turning the startup pages on or off
Conserving energy
102
103
Setting paper-handling options
Setting up job handling
103
104
Viewing the Ethernet address
104
Working with a NetWare network
Changing TCP/IP configurations
105
106
Viewing and changing communication settings
Sending PostScript files to the printer
Restarting the printer
Banner pages and NetWare
107
108
108
109
Installed Type 1 fonts and Adobe Type Manager
Installing Type 1 fonts
109
Removing Type 1 fonts
110
Changing the size of the ATM font cache
Turning ATM off or on
What to do next
109
110
110
110
4 Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users
Before you begin
Initial TCP/IP setup
111
111
112
Will these instructions work for my flavor of UNIX?
Background information
Security
112
112
112
Step 1: Installing the software the printer administrator needs
Step 2: Obtaining an IP address for the printer
Step 3: Assigning an IP address to the printer
Step 4: Making sure everything is working
What to do next
112
113
113
117
119
Contents
ix
Configuring the printer
119
Getting UNIX users started using the printer
119
Notes on configuring specific UNIX systems
121
Configuring HP-UX version 8.07
121
Configuring HP-UX version 9.xx
123
Configuring IBM AIX version 3.x
125
Configuring Sun OS version 4.1, Ultrix version 4.2,
or other BSD systems
127
What to do next
5 Installing Options
128
129
Installing the optional 250-sheet feeder
Adjusting the side margin
135
Installing the 250-sheet universal cassette
Adding hard disks
130
136
137
Connecting a previously used hard disk
Connecting external hard disks
Adding an internal hard disk
Initializing hard disks
137
137
140
143
Using external hard disks from manufacturers other than Apple
Increasing the printer RAM
Installing RAM
144
145
Configuring your software for new printer options
Configuring the Macintosh printer software
150
150
Configuring the printer from an IBM PC or compatible
x
Contents
152
144
Part II Guide for Users
6 Macintosh Users
System requirements
155
156
Installing the printer software
156
More information about the Installer program
Selecting and setting up the printer
158
159
Creating, throwing away, and manipulating desktop printer icons
Determining the status of a printer by looking at its icon
Switching between printers
160
161
Drag the document you want to print to a desktop printer icon
Select the printer using its desktop printer icon
Select a new printer using the Chooser
Printing
160
161
161
162
162
Selecting page setup options
Printing documents
162
164
Printing a cover page automatically
165
Printing color and grayscale documents
Reporting printing errors
167
Turning tray switching on or off
Printing transparencies
166
168
169
Changing the Print Quality mode
169
Printing while using the computer for other work
Monitoring and controlling background printing
Using the Apple Printer Utility
170
171
172
Contents
xi
7 Windows and DOS Users
System requirements
173
173
Installing the Windows printer software
What to do next
174
177
Installing software for Windows NT
177
Printing from Windows applications
178
Setting printer driver options
178
Opening the printer Setup dialog box from the Control Panel
Opening the printer setup dialog box from your application
179
179
Opening the printer Setup dialog box from the Print Manager
Selecting printer options in the Setup dialog box
Additional printer options
PostScript
Fonts
180
181
182
184
Features
186
Job Control
187
Watermark
188
Downloading fonts
190
Downloading fonts manually to RAM or to the hard disk
Using a hard disk
193
Adding a hard disk to the device list
Initializing the hard disk
195
Printing to a PostScript file
196
193
Using the driver to print a PostScript file
DOS notes
199
Using the Apple Printer Utility for Windows
xii
Contents
197
199
191
179
8 UNIX Users
201
Printing from a UNIX workstation to the printer
9 Loading Paper
202
203
Choosing paper
204
Automatic or manual printing with the printer
Using the standard paper cassette
Using the multipurpose tray
204
205
206
Opening the multipurpose tray
206
Placing paper and transparencies in the multipurpose tray
Loading the optional 250-sheet universal cassette
10 Maintenance
Safety first
207
211
215
216
Precautions during maintenance
Regular maintenance
Low toner
Low fuser oil
217
218
218
219
Toner disposal box is full
220
Photoconductor cartridge is wearing out
Fuser needs replacement
Cleaning the exterior
221
222
222
Cleaning the density sensor and separation discharger wire
Cleaning the paper pickup area
223
226
Contents
xiii
11 Clearing Paper Jams
227
Checking the indicator lights for paper jams
Checking for and clearing paper jams
228
229
Clearing paper from the paper pickup area
Clearing paper from the transfer drum
Clearing paper from the fuser
233
234
Clearing paper from the optional feeder
12 Fixing Image Problems
Color print quality problems
237
241
243
Problems covered in other places
243
Can’t communicate with the printer
Can’t close the printer’s door
244
Can’t turn the toner carousel
245
Macintosh troubleshooting
244
245
IBM PC or compatible troubleshooting
Novell NetWare troubleshooting
UNIX troubleshooting
Density control panel
xiv
Contents
236
237
General print quality problems
13 Troubleshooting
230
251
254
251
249
Part III Appendixes
A Technical Information and Printer Supplies
Specifications
257
257
About PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files
RAM Upgrade Specifications
Ozone emission
Supplies
265
265
Communication settings
Accessories
263
266
267
268
B Setting Up the Printer as an ATPS Remote Printer
269
Configuring ATPS for the first time on a NetWare 4 server
Configuring ATPS for the first time on a NetWare 3.x server
270
272
Modifying an existing ATPS configuration on a NetWare 3.x server
C Using Fonts With the Printer
Kinds of fonts
277
277
Bitmapped fonts
278
PostScript fonts
279
TrueType fonts
280
QuickDraw GX imaging technology
281
How TrueType fonts work with other kinds of fonts
TrueType and bitmapped fonts
281
TrueType and PostScript fonts
283
How the Macintosh looks for fonts
Where fonts are stored
Suitcases
Styled fonts
274
281
283
284
285
287
Common questions about fonts
288
Contents
xv
D Working With ColorSync
291
The problem that ColorSync solves
About ColorSync
291
292
How ColorSync works
Using ColorSync
292
293
E Packing and Moving the Printer
F Replacing the Fuser
Replacing the fuser
295
303
304
Replacing the transfer drum cleaning unit
Replacing the air and ozone filters
311
317
Replacing the separation discharger unit
G Diagnosing Problems for Service
320
323
Normal power-on status panel behavior
Paper Out and Paper Jam lights both flash
324
325
Two hardware problems you may be able to fix
Out of paper
Paper jams
325
326
327
Regular maintenance
Low toner
Low fuser oil
328
328
329
Toner disposal box is full
330
Photoconductor cartridge is wearing out
Fuser needs replacement
331
332
Problem with internal random-access memory (RAM)
Problem with the toner carousel
333
334
H Removing the Macintosh Desktop Printing Software
335
Monitoring and controlling print requests without desktop printers
Index
xvi
Contents
339
337
Communications regulation information
FCC statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device
in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. See instructions if interference to
radio or television reception is suspected.
Radio and television interference
The equipment described in this manual generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency
energy. If it is not installed and used properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s
instructions—it may cause interference with radio and television reception.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device
in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These specifications are designed
to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
You can determine whether your computer system is causing interference by turning it off. If
the interference stops, it was probably caused by the computer or one of the peripheral devices.
If your computer system does cause interference to radio or television reception, try to correct
the interference by using one or more of the following measures:
m Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.
m Move the computer to one side or the other of the television or radio.
m Move the computer farther away from the television or radio.
m Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio.
(That is, make certain the computer and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by
different circuit breakers or fuses.)
If necessary, consult an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple. See the service and support
information that came with your Apple product. Or, consult an experienced radio/television
technician for additional suggestions. You may find the following booklet helpful: Interference
Handbook (stock number 004-000-00493-1). This booklet, prepared by the Federal
Communications Commission, is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office,
Washington, DC 20402.
IMPORTANT Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by Apple Computer, Inc.,
could void the FCC Certification and negate your authority to operate the product.
This product was tested for FCC compliance under conditions that included the use of Apple
peripheral devices and Apple shielded cables and connectors between system components. It is
important that you use Apple peripheral devices and shielded cables and connectors between
system components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, television sets,
and other electronic devices. You can obtain Apple peripheral devices and the proper shielded
cables and connectors through an Apple-authorized dealer. For non-Apple peripheral devices,
contact the manufacturer or dealer for assistance.
Communications Regulation Information
xvii
DOC statement
DOC Class B Compliance This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio
noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard
entitled “Digital Apparatus,” ICES-003 of the Department of Communications.
Observation des normes—Classe B Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits
radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme
sur le matériel brouilleur : “Appareils Numériques”, NMB-003 édictée par le ministre des
Communications.
VCCI statement
Laser information
WARNING Making adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified in your
equipment’s manual may result in hazardous exposure.
WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble the cabinet containing the laser. The laser beam used in
this product is harmful to the eyes. The use of optical instruments, such as magnifying lenses,
with this product increases the potential hazard to your eyes. For your safety, have this
equipment serviced only by an Apple-authorized service provider.
Your printer is a Class 1 laser product. The Class 1 label, located at the back of the printer,
indicates that the printer meets minimum safety requirements. A service warning label is located
inside the printer.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER KLASSE 1
APPAREIL A RAYONNEMENT
LASER DE CLASSE 1
APPARECCHIO LASER DI CLASSE 1
PRODUCTO LASER DE CLASE 1
APARELHO A LASER DE CLASSE 1
EN60825:1991
Class 1 label
Service warning label
xviii
Laser Information
How Much of This Book Do I Have to Read?
The manual contains all the information you need for the Color LaserWriter
12/600 PS printer, whether you’re the printer administrator who sets it up or a
user who wants to print some transparencies for a meeting. This preface
directs you to specific chapters depending on what kind of network you have.
Printer administrators and users: Who does what
The printer is usually set up and maintained by a printer administrator and
shared by a number of users. This book is organized accordingly: Part I
contains setup information for the printer administrator, and Part II contains
setup and usage information for users.
Depending on the type of problem, troubleshooting can be
handled by the administrator or by users. The appendixes in Part III
contain additional information that administrators and users might need.
Hint: When you set up the printer, be sure to hang the quick reference
booklet inside the printer’s door. That way users have easy access to helpful
problem-solving information.
xix
What the printer administrator should know
The printer administrator sets up the hardware, installs any options, installs
the printer on the network, and helps new users get started. To accomplish
these tasks, printer administrators must
m be familiar with the network connections and topology
m have access to and knowledge of the special tools required by their
networks:
m for AppleTalk networks, no special tools required
m for Novell NetWare networks, administrative privileges and familiarity
with programs like PCONSOLE
m for TCP/IP networks with UNIX® workstations, superuser privileges and
knowledge of their UNIX system’s printing architecture
Getting new users started
In almost every case—regardless of the operating system—the printer
administrator is responsible for initial setup of the hardware and the network.
There is a great variety, however, in how different groups get new users
started. Here are the assumptions this book makes:
m Macintosh and Windows users install their own printer software.
m UNIX users have their workstations prepared for printing by the printer
administrator.
xx
Preface
Which chapters should I read?
There are five main steps to preparing the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS it so
any user can print on it. Although you could do some steps in a different
order, these steps are organized to simplify troubleshooting.
Step 1: Set up the hardware and connect the printer.
Chapter 1 explains how to unpack the printer, install everything you need
(toner cartridges, photoconductor, toner disposal box, and fuser oil), load
paper, and connect the printer to your network. At the end of the chapter, you
turn on the printer and it prints a startup page, assuring you that the printer
engine and controller board work correctly.
Step 2: Configure the printer for a network connection or for a
direct connection.
The next three chapters (plus Appendix B) explain how to configure the
printer on different networks or set it up by a direct connection:
Chapter
Computer
Network interface and cable
Chapter 2
Macintosh
AppleTalk on LocalTalk cables
AppleTalk on Ethernet cables (EtherTalk)
Chapter 3
DOS and Windows
Apple Print Monitor for Windows or
Novell NetWare on Ethernet cables
DOS and Windows
Direct connection by a parallel cable
Chapter 4
UNIX
TCP/IP on Ethernet cables
Appendix B
Macintosh
ATPS, NetWare for Macintosh on LocalTalk
or Ethernet cables
How Much of This Book Do I Have to Read?
xxi
Step 3: Set additional printer parameters.
The administrative tools provided with the printer are described in detail in
Chapters 2 and 3:
Chapter
Computer
Utility name
Chapter 2
Macintosh
Apple Printer Utility
Chapter 3
Windows
Apple Printer Utility for Windows
Though the Apple Printer Utility runs on Macintosh computers and the
Apple Printer Utility for Windows runs on Windows computers, both utilities
can be used to set additional printer parameters that affect all users.
Step 4: Add any hardware options.
Chapter 5 explains how to add any of the hardware options you may have
purchased for the printer, including
m internal or external hard disks, for storing Macintosh and Windows
downloadable fonts
m extra memory, for printing documents that contain many fonts
more quickly
m paper-handling options (the 250-sheet feeder with universal cassette)
xxii
Preface
Step 5: Help new users get started.
Part II of the manual contains information for people who plan to use (as
opposed to administer) the printer. Information about the administrator’s
responsibilities is in Part I.
User’s computer
Where to find information
Macintosh
Chapter 2 explains the administrator’s responsibilities.
Chapter 6 explains how the user gets started and how to print.
Chapter 9 explains how to load paper.
Chapter 10 explains routine maintenance.
Chapters 11, 12, and 13 explain how to fix problems with the printer.
Windows or DOS
Chapter 3 explains the administrator’s responsibilities.
Chapter 7 explains how the user gets started and how to print.
Chapter 9 explains how to load paper.
Chapter 10 explains routine maintenance.
Chapters 11, 12, and 13 explain how to fix problems with the printer.
UNIX
Chapter 4 explains the administrator’s responsibilities.
Chapter 8 explains how the user gets started and how to print.
Chapter 9 explains how to load paper.
Chapter 10 explains routine maintenance.
Chapters 11, 12, and 13 explain how to fix problems with the printer.
Solving problems
m For paper jam problems, see Chapter 11.
m For image problems, see Chapter 12.
m For other troubleshooting, see Chapter 13 and Appendix G.
How Much of This Book Do I Have to Read?
xxiii
Guide for Printer
Administrators
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Setting Up the
Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
Health and Safety Information
Setting Up the Printer for
Learning toUsers
Use Your Computer
Macintosh
Chapter 34
Chapter
Basic Skills
Setting
Up the Printer for
Windows and NetWare Users
Part I of this book provides the information you need
Chapter 4 Setting Up the Printer for
to set up and UNIX
lean about
Usersyour Macintosh. It includes
instructions
Chapter
5 forInstalling Options
m setting up the computer and turning it on
Part
I of this
book provides
m using
the computer
safelythe information you need
to set up the printer for your workgroup.
m learning basic Macintosh skills
If you want to use a printer that has already been set
If you are new to the Macintosh, go through all the
up, see Part II.
chapters in this section. You’ll find a tutorial in
Chapter 3 that will acquaint you with Macintosh
skills.
If you’re an experienced Macintosh user, go through
the setup instructions in Chapter 1 and read the
health and safety information in Chapter 2, then
proceed to Part II, “More About Your Macintosh.”
I
part
1
Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
Main features of the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
m Print quality The printer has a resolution of 600 x 600 dots per inch, with
color PhotoGrade.
m Speed The printer prints up to 12 pages per minute in black, cyan,
magenta, or yellow; 3 pages per minute in two or more colors; and 1
transparency per minute.
m Multiplatform support You can connect the printer to Macintosh, Windows,
DOS, and UNIX computers.
m Connectivity The printer offers LocalTalk, Ethernet, and parallel
connections.
m Automatic traffic control Without any user intervention, the printer can accept
jobs simultaneously from AppleTalk, TCP/IP, and NetWare networks and
from the parallel port.
m Fonts The printer supports both TrueType and PostScript™ fonts. The
printer has 39 built-in PostScript fonts.
m Energy savings The printer can automatically lower its power consumption
when it’s not being used.
m Hard disk option You can install an internal hard disk or attach up to six
external hard disks to store downloadable fonts.
m Flexible paper handling You can print up to 350 sheets (250 in the standard
paper cassette plus 100 in the multipurpose tray) without changing paper.
You can also add a 250-sheet feeder.
1
Anatomy of the printer
Front view
Top cover
access door
Face-down
output tray
Fuser oil
compartment
Fuser
access door
Quick reference
Toner cartridge
carousel knob
Standard
paper cassette
Back view
Toner disposal
box cover
Density control
panel
Transfer
drum lever
Parallel port
Power switch
Paper pickup
access door
Ethernet port
LocalTalk port
SCSI port
Multipurpose
tray access door
Face-up output tray
access door
Power cord receptacle
2
Chapter 1
Configuration switch
Choosing a place for the printer
Choose a flat, stable area with adequate room around the printer. The area
should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat,
cold, or humidity. (Abrupt changes in temperature and extremely high or low
humidity can adversely affect print quality.)
Don’t put the printer near devices that produce magnetic fields. Don’t use
ammonia-based cleaners, which can react chemically with the toner and the
plastic, on or around the printer. (For instructions on cleaning the printer, see
Chapter 10.)
IMPORTANT The printer weighs approximately 110 pounds (approximately 50
kilograms). Make sure you place it on a desk or table that’s strong enough to
hold the weight. Don’t lift the printer by yourself. Have at least one other
person assist you.
Allow space to open the top
for clearing paper jams.
Allow space for air
flow around the fan.
Allow enough space
to open the door.
The Apple logo marks
the front of the printer.
Make sure you have enough space
to open the paper cassette.
See Appendix A for more information about the physical requirements of
the printer.
Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
3
Important safety instructions
Before you plug in your printer, read these important safety instructions.
WARNING This equipment is intended to be electrically grounded. Your
printer is equipped with a three-wire grounding plug—a plug that has a
third (grounding) pin. This plug will fit only a grounded AC outlet. This
is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet,
contact a licensed electrician to replace the outlet with a properly
grounded outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding plug!
For your own safety and that of your equipment, always take the following
precautions.
If any of the following conditions exists, disconnect the power plug (by
pulling the plug, not the cord):
m the power cord or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged
m you spill something into the case
m your printer is exposed to rain or any other excess moisture
m your printer has been dropped or the case has been otherwise damaged
m you suspect that your printer needs service or repair
m you want to clean the case (use only the recommended procedure
described in Chapter 10)
4
Chapter 1
Be sure that you always do the following:
m Keep your printer away from sources of liquids, such as wash basins,
bathtubs, shower stalls, and so on.
m Protect your printer from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow, and
so on.
m Do not allow children access to the fuser oil bottle, toner cartridges, or
used toner disposal boxes.
m Read all the installation instructions carefully before you plug your printer
into a wall socket.
m Keep these instructions handy for reference by you and others.
m Follow all instructions and warnings dealing with your system.
WARNING Electrical equipment may be hazardous if misused. Operation
of this product, or similar products, must always be supervised by an
adult. Do not allow children access to the interior of any electrical
product and do not permit them to handle any cables.
Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
5
Unpacking the printer
IMPORTANT The printer weighs approximately 110 pounds (approximately 50
kilograms). Don’t lift it by yourself.
1
Undo the clips on the outside of the printer box.
2
Lift the box, uncovering the printer.
If possible, get another person to help you.
3
With another person, remove the plastic bag, then lift the printer and place it in the
location you’ve chosen.
IMPORTANT This side of the
printer is heavier than the other side.
IMPORTANT Do not plug in the printer or turn it on until you’ve completed
setup, including all the network connections, as explained later in this
chapter. Be sure to remove all the packing materials from inside the printer.
6
Chapter 1
4
Remove the packing tape from the outside of the printer.
There are five pieces of tape attached at various points on the printer.
5
Open the fuser access door and remove the two orange spacers from inside.
6
Open the paper cassette and remove the cardboard packing material.
Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
7
7
Slide the paper cassette back into the printer.
8
Open the front door and remove the shipping screw.
The screw is encased in an orange plastic sheath. Turn the screw, using a coin
or Phillips screwdriver, and pull it out. Put the shipping screw in a safe place
in case you ever need to ship the printer to a new location.
Leave the printer’s door open. The next few sections contain instructions on
installing other items from the printer setup kit.
It’s a good idea to save the shipping carton and other packing materials in
case you need to transport the printer at some time.
8
Chapter 1
Installing the quick reference booklet
The quick reference booklet helps users solve some problems with the
printer. For example, the quick reference tells users how to clear a paper jam
and load paper into the paper cassette. It should always be inside the printer,
available to users who don’t have this manual.
Take the quick reference out of the printer setup kit and hang it inside the
printer door.
Hang the quick reference on the hooks
inside the printer’s door. (Be sure to let
other users know it’s there.)
Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
9
Installing the fuser oil bottle
1
Take the bottle of fuser oil out of the printer setup kit.
2
To remove the seal from the bottle, pull the orange tab.
3
Open the cover of the fuser oil compartment.
Open the cover.
10
Chapter 1
4
Install the oil bottle.
Gently tip the bottle upside down
and slide it into the compartment.
Press the bottle down. (This opens the
mechanism in the lid so the oil can
flow into the compartment.)
IMPORTANT If any fuser oil spills on the floor, clean it up immediately with
paper towels. The oil is very slippery.
5
Close the cover over the fuser oil bottle.
Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
11
Installing the photoconductor cartridge and toner disposal box
The photoconductor is a photosensitive device that captures an image in toner
and transfers it to the paper. The toner disposal box is where the printer
deposits any excess toner powder. You’ll find a photoconductor cartridge and
two toner disposal boxes in the printer setup kit.
IMPORTANT The photoconductor is sensitive to light. Do not open the package
until you are ready to install the photoconductor cartridge. Inside the foil bag,
the photoconductor cartridge sits in an orange protective tray designed to
make installation easy and to protect the photoconductor from being touched
or exposed to light. Do not take the photoconductor cartridge out of the tray.
If you scratch the photoconductor, the marks can appear on every page you
print (until you replace the photoconductor cartridge). Prolonged exposure to
light shortens the life of the photoconductor.
1
Push the transfer drum lever down and to the right.
This releases a locking mechanism.
Push the transfer drum lever to the right.
12
Chapter 1
2
Open the disposal box cover.
Move the disposal box
cover to the left.
The photoconductor cartridge goes here.
Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
13
3
Holding the orange tray, line up the top of the photoconductor cartridge with the tracks
at the top of the opening in the printer.
Line up the arrow on the
photoconductor cartridge
with the arrow above the
compartment opening.
14
Chapter 1
The top of the photoconductor
cartridge slides on these tracks.
4
Slide the photoconductor cartridge all the way into the receptacle.
When the photoconductor cartridge is
most of the way in, you can remove the orange tray.
Save the orange tray in case you ever need to remove the photoconductor for
troubleshooting.
Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
15
5
Make sure the photoconductor cartridge latch is in the locked position.
Push the photoconductor
cartridge until this latch is
in the locked position.
16
Chapter 1
6
Slide the toner disposal box into place.
The opening in the top
of the box fits here.
Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
17
7
Raise the transfer drum lever to lock the photoconductor cartridge in place.
8
Close the disposal box cover.
Disposal box cover
Now go on to install the toner cartridges.
18
Chapter 1
Installing the toner cartridges
You’ll find four toner cartridges in the bottom of the printer setup kit. Each
toner cartridge contains the dry plastic powder that the printer uses instead
of ink. The first time you install the toner cartridges, follow the steps given
here. After that, each time you install a cartridge, follow the instructions in
Chapter 10. (Instructions also come with replacement toner cartridges.)
Cartridge life varies, depending on the kind of printing you do. If you use the
printer to produce more graphic images than text, you may need to change
cartridges more often. (For product specifications, see Appendix A.)
1
Before you do anything, notice some important features on the toner cartridge carousel.
You use this knob to turn the carousel.
Notice the arrows that show the
direction to turn the knob.
You insert a toner
cartridge into this opening.
Colored tabs show
which color toner
cartridge belongs
in each position.
Release lever
IMPORTANT The toner cartridge carousel inside the printer has a specific place
for each color. You cannot place colors in the wrong location.
Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
19
2
Press the knob that rotates the carousel and turn the knob clockwise.
Pressing the knob releases the locking mechanism so the carousel can turn.
Press the knob firmly,
then begin turning it
clockwise.
As you turn the knob,
the carousel turns.
Problem? If you try to turn the knob, but it won’t turn, you haven’t pressed the
knob far enough to release the carousel.
As soon as the carousel starts to turn, you can stop pressing on the knob.
Release the pressure and continue turning.
20
Chapter 1
3
Turn gently until the carousel locks into a new position.
Notice that the color of
the tabs has changed.
As you rotate the carousel through all four positions, the tab colors cycle from
magenta (pink) to cyan (blue) to yellow to black.
Cartridge carousel cycle
Yellow
Cyan
Black
Magenta
Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
21
4
Take the toner cartridge out of its packaging and remove the two pieces of packing tape.
Choose the toner color that matches the colored tabs beside the opening in
the carousel.
Notice the arrow embossed
on the toner cartridge.
The color of the toner inside should
show through this small window in the
top of the toner cartridge.
5
Distribute the toner powder.
Gently rock the toner
cartridge back and forth.
22
Chapter 1
6
To remove the sealing tape, grasp the orange plastic tab and pull it away from the
cartridge.
Pull the tape completely out.
7
Insert the toner cartridge into the carousel.
Align the arrow on the toner cartridge
with the arrow on the carousel. Then
slide the toner cartridge into the printer.
Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
23
8
After you insert the toner cartridge all the way, push firmly to lock it in place.
If you don’t press firmly enough to install the cartridge correctly, you won’t be
able to rotate the carousel and install another cartridge.
Press the toner cartridge
until it snaps into place.
9
Repeat steps 2 through 8 until you’ve installed all four toner cartridges.
The process is essentially the same for each cartridge.
Wait to install the printer options
If you purchased any of the following options, wait to install them until
you’ve connected the printer to your network:
m internal or external hard disks
m memory
m 250-sheet feeder
By waiting, you can ensure the printer is working correctly (thus simplifying
troubleshooting) before you add the options.
24
Chapter 1
Loading paper into the paper cassette
You can load paper into the paper cassette or the multipurpose tray, or both.
For instructions on using the multipurpose tray, see Chapter 9.
The multipurpose tray
holds up to 100 sheets of
paper or 50 transparencies.
The paper cassette holds up to 250 sheets
of paper. With the optional universal cassette, you
can load U.S. letter, A4, B5, or legal-size paper.
You can also use the tray for
manual feed printing.
You can expect excellent printing results from photocopier paper. For best
results, use paper labeled “laser-quality.” (For paper specifications, see
Appendix A.)
Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
25
1
Slide the paper cassette out of the printer.
Grasp the handle, squeeze to
release the latch, lift and pull the cassette out.
2
Prepare a stack of paper.
You can load up to 250 sheets of 20-pound photocopier paper. Make sure the
edges are even on all sides before inserting the stack of paper.
3
Slide the stack into the cassette.
Slide paper under the retainers.
26
Chapter 1
Do not stack paper
higher than this point.
4
Slide the paper under the bracket at the front of the cassette.
Load three-hole punched
paper with the holes toward
the back of the cassette.
Load letterhead paper face up.
AB
C
Make sure paper fits under
these corner brackets.
You can push the paper down,
but don’t overload the cassette.
WARNING Never load a cassette with paper of the wrong size or type.
Doing so may cause a paper jam, damage the printer drum, or use toner
unnecessarily.
Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
27
5
Slide the cassette into the printer.
Push the cassette in
all the way. It should
be flush with the printer.
Full
Paper level indicator
28
Chapter 1
Empty
Connecting the printer
You can connect the printer to a number of computers and a variety networks
using the printer’s LocalTalk, Ethernet, and parallel ports. The printer prints
only one user’s job at a time, but it manages incoming print jobs from all
ports so that no printing conflicts or problems occur.
ˆ LocalTalk port
g SCSI port
G Ethernet port
Parallel port
Configuration
switch
Port
Network interface
Computer
LocalTalk
AppleTalk
Macintosh
Ethernet
AppleTalk (EtherTalk)
Macintosh
Novell NetWare
DOS and Windows
Novell ATPS
Macintosh
TCP/IP
Macintosh
DOS and Windows
UNIX
IEEE 1284 ECP
DOS and Windows
Parallel
Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
29
Connecting to an Ethernet network
A single Ethernet cable can carry a number of network protocols, including
AppleTalk (sometimes called EtherTalk when it’s on an Ethernet network),
Novell NetWare, and TCP/IP. To connect the printer to an Ethernet network
running any combination of these protocols, follow these steps:
1
Obtain an Ethernet transceiver and a length of Ethernet cable appropriate for your
network’s media type—thin, AUI, or twisted pair.
Apple Ethernet
thin coaxial transceiver
Apple Ethernet
AUI adapter
Apple Ethernet
twisted-pair transceiver
Note: These Apple transceivers are self-terminating. Do not add a terminator
to the end of the network. If you’re not using Apple network devices, check
the instructions that came with the transceivers you are using.
2
30
Chapter 1
Plug the short cable from the transceiver into the Ethernet port (G) on the printer.
3
Connect the printer to the Ethernet network in one of these three ways:
m To connect the printer to the end of an Ethernet network, use the Ethernet
cable to connect the empty socket of the nearest device’s transceiver to the
printer’s transceiver, as shown here.
m To connect the printer between two devices on an Ethernet network,
disconnect one Ethernet cable from the transceiver of the device
immediately to the left or right of the printer and plug it into the new
printer’s transceiver. Then use the new Ethernet cable to connect the free
socket on the printer’s transceiver to the socket you freed on the other
device’s transceiver.
m To connect the printer to an Ethernet hub, see the documentation that came
with the Ethernet hub.
Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
31
What to do after connecting to an Ethernet network
m If you wish to connect the printer to other networks, or to connect the
printer directly to a single Macintosh or to an IBM PC or compatible, see
the appropriate sections later in this chapter.
m If you’re finished connecting the printer, skip to “Adjusting Communication
Settings,” later in this chapter.
For more information about setting up the printer for different network
interfaces, see Chapters 2, 3, and 4.
Connecting to a LocalTalk network
If you have an existing LocalTalk network, here’s how to add the printer to it.
1
Obtain a LocalTalk connecting kit.
Connector box
LocalTalk cable
LocalTalk connecting kits come in many varieties. Yours may look different.
The kit illustrated above is an Apple product (part number M1657Z/A) and
comes with RJ-11 connectors. Apple also produces another LocalTalk kit with
different connectors (part number M2068LL/B).
2
32
Chapter 1
Plug the connector box into the LocalTalk port (ˆ) on the printer.
3
Connect the printer to the network in one of these two ways:
m To connect the printer to the end of a LocalTalk network, use the LocalTalk
cable to connect the empty socket of the nearest device’s connector box to
the printer’s connector box.
m To connect the printer between two devices on a LocalTalk network,
disconnect one LocalTalk cable from the connector box of the device
immediately to the left or right of the printer and plug it into the new
printer’s connector box. Then use the new LocalTalk cable to connect the
free socket on the printer’s connector box to the socket you freed on the
other device’s connector box.
What to do after connecting to a LocalTalk network
m To connect the printer directly to a single Macintosh or to an IBM PC or
compatible computer, see the appropriate sections later in this chapter.
m If you’re finished connecting the printer, skip to “Adjusting Communication
Settings,” later in this chapter.
For more information about setting up the printer on a LocalTalk network,
see Chapter 2. For information about setting up the printer on a Novell
network running ATPS, see Appendix B.
Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
33
Connecting directly to a single Macintosh
Use this method to connect a single Macintosh to the printer.
1
Obtain two LocalTalk Kits.
2
Plug one LocalTalk connector into the computer’s printer ([) port.
3
Plug one end of the cable into the LocalTalk connector on the computer.
4
Plug the second LocalTalk connector into the printer’s LocalTalk (ˆ) port.
5
Plug the other end of the cable into the LocalTalk connector on the printer.
Printer
port
ˆ
LocalTalk
port
Note: You can use Ethernet transceivers (instead of LocalTalk connectors) to
connect a Macintosh directly to the printer.
34
Chapter 1
What to do after connecting to a single Macintosh
m If you wish to connect the printer to other networks, or to connect the
printer directly to an IBM PC or compatible computer, see the appropriate
sections later in this chapter.
m If you’re finished connecting the printer, skip to “Adjusting Communication
Settings,” later in this chapter.
See Chapter 2 for more information about setting up the printer on a
LocalTalk network or Appendix B for information about setting up the
printer on a Novell network running ATPS.
Connecting to an IBM PC or compatible with a parallel cable
1
Obtain a parallel interface cable like this one.
IMPORTANT You must purchase this cable, part number M4235ZM/A,
designed for the parallel port on the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS. If you try
to use any other cable, you may damage the printer’s parallel port.
25-pin
connector
Mini 25-pin
connector
Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
35
2
Use the parallel cable to connect the computer to the printer.
Attach the cable’s smaller connector
to this port on the printer.
Attach the cable to the parallel port on
your computer. (Your computer’s parallel
port may be in a different location.)
Parallel interface cable
3
Check to make sure the port selected in the dialog box matches the one you connected
the printer to.
Open the Control Panels, then open the Printers control panel and check the
settings in the Setup Printer dialog. (LPT1 is the recommended setting.)
What to do after connecting directly to an IBM PC or compatible
Connect the power cable and turn on the printer, as explained later in this
chapter. For more information about setting up the printer, see Chapter 3.
36
Chapter 1
Connecting the power and turning on the printer
Once you’ve connected the printer to your networks, you’re ready to start up
the printer. Follow these steps to make sure everything is working correctly.
1
Make sure the printer is turned off.
If you can’t tell whether the switch
is in or out, press and release it
once or twice until you’re sure the
switch is out and the printer is off.
2
Off position
On position
Plug in the printer.
Insert the socket end of the power cord into the receptacle on the back of the
printer. Plug the other end into a grounded (three-hole) AC outlet.
Power cord receptacle
Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
37
3
Press the power switch to turn the printer on.
The printer takes about 3 minutes to warm up. During warm-up, various
status lights flash, and the printer performs an autocalibration procedure,
ensuring good color printing quality.
On position
4
Save the startup page. It contains information you may need to complete network setup.
The Ready/In Use light should glow steadily. If it doesn’t, or if different lights
come on, see Appendix G for information about status lights.
Every time you restart the printer, it automatically prints a startup page and a
demonstration page unless you turn either or both of the pages off using the
Apple Printer Utility (described in Chapter 2) or the Apple Printer Utility for
Windows (described in Chapter 3).
The startup page shows how the printer is set up, including the network
connection types and what options are attached to the printer.
Both pages should look clean and sharp. If they are spotty, too light or too
dark, or otherwise unclear, switch the printer off and on to print the pages a
second time. Try this two or three times if necessary. If the output doesn’t
improve, or if the printer won’t print the pages, refer to Chapter 12, “Fixing
Image Problems.”
38
Chapter 1
5
Check the status lights.
After the startup and demonstration pages are printed, the Ready/In Use light
glows steadily. All other lights should be off. If any other lights are on, see
Appendix G.
Toner Low lights
M
C
Bk
Y
Maintenance lights
!
Ready/In Use light
Paper Jam light
Alert light
Paper Out light
Saving energy
Your Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS meets Energy Star guidelines for saving
energy. By default, the printer enters an energy-saving mode after it’s been
idle for 60 minutes. You can adjust the idle delay by using the Apple Printer
Utility on the Macintosh or the Apple Printer Utility for Windows.
You can also save energy on the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS, as well as on
all other printers (including those without energy-saving features), by taking
these steps:
m Use the page preview feature provided in many programs to check page
layout rather than printing a draft.
m If you know you won’t be using the printer for a while—say, a three-day
weekend—turn it off.
Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
39
Adjusting communication settings
Though you can adjust many of the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
communication settings, the standard (factory default) settings work for
most environments.
Configuration
switch
Standard (factory default) settings for the parallel port
Port
Mode
Data
Protocol
Parallel
On
AutoSelect
TBCP
Standard (factory default) settings for the other ports
40
Chapter 1
Port
Interface
Mode
LocalTalk
LocalTalk
On
Ethernet
EtherTalk
On
NetWare
On
TCP/IP
On
If you have changed any of the settings and want to reset the printer to the
standard settings, move the configuration switch on the printer to the lefthand position. Then restart the printer (using the Restart Printer command
from the Apple Printer Utility or by turning the printer off and then on).
Finally, return the switch to the right-hand position.
Why customize communication settings?
Though the standard communication settings work well for most
environments, you might want to customize communication settings to turn
off network interfaces you don’t need. For example, if you know the printer
will never receive a NetWare message over the network, you can turn off the
interface and stop the printer from sending out unnecessary NetWare packets.
How to customize communication settings
Change the settings with either of the following two programs:
m Apple Printer Utility on the Macintosh (see Chapter 2 for details on how to
install and use the program)
m Apple Printer Utility for Windows (see Chapter 3 for details on how to
install and use the program)
Custom settings for the parallel port
Port
Mode
Data
Protocol
Parallel
On
AutoSelect,
Normal, Raw, TBCP
Compatibility,
IDP
Custom settings for the other ports
Port
Interface
Mode Possible Values
LocalTalk
LocalTalk
On
Ethernet
EtherTalk
On
or
Off
NetWare
On
or
Off
TCP/IP
On
or
Off
Setting Up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
41
How to return to the default settings
To return to the factory default settings, move the configuration switch to the
left-hand position and restart the printer. Choose Restart Printer from the
Utilities menu (in the Apple Printer Utility) or turn the printer off and on.
Finally, be sure to return the switch to the right-hand position.
What to do next
Finish preparing the printer and completing the network connections by
reading one or more of the following chapters:
m Chapter 2 explains how to administer the printer on an AppleTalk network
and how to help Macintosh users start using the printer.
m Chapter 3 explains how to administer the printer on an Ethernet network and
how to help Windows and NetWare users get started using the printer. It also
explains how to set up a direct connection to an IBM PC or compatible
computer.
m Chapter 4 explains how to set up the printer on a TCP/IP network and how to
help UNIX users get started using the printer.
42
Chapter 1
2
Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users
This chapter explains how to prepare the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS for use
on an AppleTalk network, configure the printer using the Apple Printer
Utility, and prepare users’ Macintosh computers to print on the printer.
Note: For instructions on setting up the printer for access by Macintosh client
computers on a NetWare network, see Appendix B.
43
Before you begin
Before you begin, make sure you have
m set up the printer as described in Chapter 1
m connected the printer to your network
m made backup copies of the printer disks
IMPORTANT To use the printer software, you need a Macintosh with a 68020
or higher central processing unit (any Macintosh except a Macintosh Plus,
SE, Classic®, Portable, or PowerBook 100). Your Macintosh must have system
software version 7.1 or later and at least 4 megabytes (MB) of memory. If your
system software is an earlier version, you should obtain a system software
upgrade from an Apple-authorized dealer. (You must upgrade every user on
the network who doesn’t have system software version 7.1 or later.)
Installing all the printer software and fonts for the Macintosh requires
approximately 7.5 MB of free space on your hard disk.
Initial AppleTalk setup
Before Macintosh users can print with the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS, the
printer administrator must install the printer software and fonts and configure
the printer.
44
Chapter 2
Step 1: Installing the software the printer administrator needs
To install the printer software on a Macintosh computer, follow these steps:
IMPORTANT Do not “drag install” the printer software. If you do, the files
won’t be properly decompressed and won’t work.
1
Turn off any automatic virus-detection programs you have on your Macintosh computer.
If you don’t, problems may occur during the installation. After installation is
complete, you can turn the virus-detection programs back on. (For
instructions on turning off each virus-detection program, see the manual that
came with the program, or telephone the manufacturer of the program.)
2
Press and hold down the Shift key, then choose Restart from the Special menu.
When a message on the screen tells you that the extensions are off, you can
release the Shift key. Your extensions have been turned off. When you restart
the Macintosh after software installation, the extensions will turn on again.
3
Make sure the printer software disks are locked.
4
Insert Printer Disk 1 for Macintosh into a disk drive.
If necessary, open the disk icon.
5
To start the Installer program, double-click its icon.
6
In the Welcome dialog box that appears, click Continue.
After a moment, the Install dialog box appears. At the top of the dialog box is
a pop-up menu set to allow you to perform an Easy install.
IMPORTANT The Installer checks to make sure you have what you need to use
the printer software. If you’re missing anything, a message tells you what you
need. You won’t be able to install the printer software until you correct the
problem. If a dialog box says you don’t have the correct system software, you
can purchase a new version from an Apple-authorized dealer.
Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users
45
7
In the Installer dialog box, click the Install button.
Make sure the disk
named here is the
one on which you
want to install the
printer software.
When you’re ready to
begin, click Install.
The Installer takes a few moments to calculate what needs to be done and
then begins to install files.
8
Follow the instructions on the screen until the installation is complete.
9
When you see a message reporting that installation was successful, click Restart.
The Installer restarts your Macintosh.
The software is now installed on the hard disk. If you turned off any
automatic virus-detection programs on your Macintosh, turn them
on again.
Note: If installation is not successful, see Chapter 13 for suggestions.
More information about the Installer program
In the procedure just described, the Installer places all the software you need
on your hard disk. In rare circumstances, you many want to install only a
subset of the software. In that case, choose Custom Install from the pop-up
menu in the Installer. A list of choices appears. To install something from the
list, click to select it, then click the Install button. (There is also a Custom
Remove feature.)
46
Chapter 2
Step 2: Choosing the printer on the administrator’s computer
Before you can use the printer, you must use the Chooser to select the printer
and set up the printer software. You only have to set up the printer software
once, when you first select it.
Once you select the printer in the Chooser, you won’t need to repeat this step
unless you change printers or change the way your printer is connected.
1
Choose the Chooser from the Apple (K) menu.
2
In the Chooser dialog box, click items to select them.
First, click this icon.
(If necessary, use the
scroll bar and arrows
to find the icon.)
Third, click the name of the
printer you want to use.
(An icon beside a printer
name means the printer
software has already been
set up.)
Second, if the
network has zones,
click one to select it.
Finally, click Setup.
(Or double-click the printer
name—a shortcut.)
The Chooser identifies the type of printer and automatically sets up the
printer software. A small printer icon appears beside the printer name.
After you close the Chooser, an icon representing the printer appears on the
desktop. If you want, you can repeat step 2, selecting and setting up other
printers so all their icons appear on your desktop for easy access.
3
Close the Chooser.
Anyone who wants to use the printer must follow this procedure at least once.
Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users
47
Step 3: Making sure everything is working
The best way to make sure everything is set up correctly is to print something.
As a simple test, open and print the Read Me file that is in the Apple
LaserWriter Software folder.
1
Locate the Read Me file in the Apple LaserWriter Software folder.
2
Click the Read Me file to select it, and choose Print from the File menu (or drag the Read
Me file to the desktop printer icon and drop it on the printer).
The Print dialog box appears listing the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS printer
as the selected printer. If the printer’s name does not appear in the dialog box,
see “Step 2: Choosing the Printer on the Administrator’s Computer.”
3
Click Print.
If the document doesn’t print, check the steps you followed in Chapter 1 for
connecting and turning on the printer. Make sure that you have installed the
toner cartridges and loaded paper into the paper cassette. Check that no
packing material or paper has caused a jam in the printer.
Also check that you have followed all the software installation steps presented
in this chapter.
If the printer still won’t print, indicator lights on the printer’s status panel
blink to signal different errors and printing conditions. Check the lights and
refer to Appendix G for their meaning. You can also check the status
messages that appear in the PrintMonitor (during background printing) to see
if error messages appear that might help you identify the problem.
What to do next
You may change some of the printer’s default settings using the Apple Printer
Utility as explained in the next section. Then you can set up users’ computers
as explained in “Getting Macintosh Users Started Using the Printer,” later in
this chapter. If you want to install any hardware options, see Chapter 5.
48
Chapter 2
Changing printer settings with the Apple Printer Utility
Though the printer itself has no control panel, you can change some settings
on the printer by using programs on computers connected to it:
m On Macintosh computers, use the Apple Printer Utility, described in this
chapter.
m On IBM PC and compatible computers, use the Apple Printer Utility for
Windows, described in Chapter 3.
The Apple Printer Utility program lets you change the default settings that
control how various aspects of the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS work. The
utility is placed in the Apple LaserWriter Software folder when the printer
software is installed. Use it to choose the basic printer settings that you want
to use for all documents.
You can use the Print and Page Setup dialog boxes to change some other
printer settings without changing the printer’s basic defaults.
IMPORTANT Changes you make with the Apple Printer Utility affect everyone
who uses the printer.
Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users
49
Use the Apple Printer Utility to
m view information about the printer, such as the AppleTalk printer name and
the total number of pages the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS has printed
m name the printer on AppleTalk networks
m identify the printer’s physical location
m download fonts to the printer or attached hard disks
m remove fonts
m print font samples
m initialize internal or external hard disks connected to the printer
m turn printing of the startup page on or off
m turn printing of the demonstration page on or off
m conserve power consumption by setting the energy-saving delay
m set paper-handling options
m set when the printer closes print jobs to provide faster throughput
m set the printer’s error timeout
m set the printer’s AppleTalk zone
m view the printer’s Ethernet address
m set the NetWare configuration
m set the TCP/IP configuration
m view and configure the printer’s communication settings
m send PostScript files to the printer
m restart the printer
50
Chapter 2
Opening the Apple Printer Utility
The Apple Printer Utility has two windows: the Printer Selector window,
which is similar to the Chooser, and the printer features window, which you
use to view or change the printer’s settings.
1
Double-click the Apple Printer Utility.
The Installer puts the Apple Printer Utility in the Apple LaserWriter Software
folder. You can move it wherever you like.
2
In the Printer Selector window that appears, select and open the printer you want.
If the network has
zones, click a zone
to select it.
Printers in that zone
are listed here.
Click the name of the
printer you want.
3
Click Open Printer.
The printer features window appears.
Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users
51
4
To open a category and display its information and options, click the arrow beside the
category name.
This category tells
you about the printer
you selected.
To verify that the printer
received the changes you sent,
click this button.
You can change
some settings in
these categories.
To restore the original software
settings, click Set Defaults.
Additional options may appear that you can also open and work with. When
you are finished changing options in a particular category, you can click the
arrow again to collapse the options.
5
After viewing the information and making changes, click the Send button to send your
changes to the printer.
6
When you are finished making changes, click the close box to close the window.
The next sections describe configuration procedures that you can perform
with the Apple Printer Utility. First select and open the printer in the Printer
Selector window. The information and procedures described in each section
then present how to work with the printer features window of the utility.
Quitting the Apple Printer Utility
To quit the Apple Printer Utility:
m Choose Quit from the File menu.
52
Chapter 2
Viewing printer information
You can view information about your Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS by
displaying the printer information in the printer features window.
m Open the Printer Information category.
To change the printer’s
AppleTalk name, see the
next section, “Naming
the Printer.”
You cannot change the
other settings shown here.
You see a list of printer information.
Naming the printer
To help users easily select the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS printer from their
computers, give the printer a unique name based, for example, on its location
or the group of users who commonly share it. You can name or rename any
laser printer on the AppleTalk network.
IMPORTANT Be sure to tell users what the printer name is and what zone it’s
located in when you install the printer software on their computers or instruct
them to do so.
1
Open the Printer Preferences category.
You see a list of preferences.
2
Open the Name category.
Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users
53
3
In the panel that appears, type a new name.
When the panel opens, it shows the selected printer’s current name.
Type a new name here.
4
To send the new name setting to the printer, click Send.
Identifying the printer’s physical location
You can type a description of the printer’s location.
1
Open the Printer Preferences category.
You see a list of preferences.
2
Open the Location category.
3
In the panel that appears, type a description of the printer’s location.
Type here.
4
54
Chapter 2
Click Send.
Sending fonts to the printer
You can send additional fonts (sometimes called downloading fonts) to the
printer’s RAM or to the printer’s optional hard disk. You do not have to
download fonts to use them in printed documents, but doing so can make
your documents print more quickly.
1
Open the Printer Preferences category.
You see a list of preferences.
2
Open the Fonts category.
The Fonts panel appears.
The icons in the Location
column show where fonts are
stored—in the printer’s ROM or
RAM, or on a SCSI hard disk.
The list shows fonts
already available to
the printer. If you see
a font here, you don’t
need to add it.
3
Click Add.
Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users
55
4
In the dialog box that appears, click a font to select it, then click Add.
The Fonts folder (inside the System Folder) is one place to find fonts.
Click a font,
then click Add.
(Or double-click
the font.)
Fonts you add are gathered here until
you click Send.
If you change your mind, you can select
fonts and click Remove.
(Or click Remove All and start over.)
5
Use the Destination pop-up menu to choose a destination for the fonts.
You can send fonts to the printer’s RAM.
If you have installed an internal hard disk, its
SCSI ID is 0 (zero). You can choose 0 and
send fonts to the internal hard disk.
If you have an external hard disk connected
to the printer, you can choose its SCSI ID and
send fonts to the hard disk.
Fonts you send to the printer’s RAM are lost whenever the printer is turned
off, whereas fonts sent to the printer’s hard disk are not lost when the printer
is turned off.
6
56
Chapter 2
Click Send.
Removing fonts
When you no longer need them, you can remove fonts from the printer’s
memory or a hard disk connected to the printer.
1
Open the Printer Preferences category.
You see a list of preferences.
2
Open the Fonts category.
3
In the Fonts panel that appears, select the fonts you want to remove.
The icons in the Location
column show where fonts are
stored—in the printer’s ROM or
RAM, or on a SCSI hard disk.
You cannot remove fonts from
the printer’s ROM.
Click a font
to select it.
4
Click Remove.
Printing font samples
You can print a list of the fonts currently stored in the printer’s memory (both
RAM and ROM) and on optional hard disks attached to the printer.
m Choose Print Font Samples from the File menu.
Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users
57
Initializing a hard disk connected to the printer
If you connect an internal or external hard disk to the printer, you need to
initialize the disk before you can download fonts to it. (See Chapter 5 for
information about connecting hard disks to the printer.)
The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS printer recognizes disks formatted for use
with the Macintosh hierarchical file system (HFS) format. The printer will
not recognize disks using other formats. If you connect a disk that is not
formatted for HFS, you will need to reinitialize the disk and then reload any
fonts from your computer.
IMPORTANT Reinitializing erases all fonts previously stored on the disk.
1
Open the Printer Preferences category.
2
Open the Disks category.
3
In the panel that appears, select the disk you want to initialize and click Initialize.
If you turn on a disk after you
turn on the printer, the disk
appears as “unmounted.”
(To mount the disk properly,
you must restart the printer.)
If you don’t turn on a disk, it
won’t appear in this panel.
Select the disk you
want to initialize.
A message warns that initializing erases the entire contents of the disk—
including any fonts.
4
Click Initialize to proceed.
It takes some time to complete the initialization process. The printer won’t be
available for printing until the hard disk is initialized.
58
Chapter 2
Turning the startup pages on or off
The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS normally prints a startup page and a
demonstration page when you turn the printer on. The startup page shows the
printer’s name, the total number of pages printed, the amount of memory,
installed options, and communication settings. You can turn this feature off if
you wish.
1
Open the Printer Preferences category.
You see a list of preferences.
2
Open the Startup Pages category.
3
In the panel that appears, click the checkboxes to turn either the startup page or the
demonstration page (or both) on or off.
The X means
the printer is set to
print the startup
page and the
demonstration page.
4
To send the startup page setting to the printer, click Send.
Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users
59
Conserving energy
Your Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS automatically reduces its power
consumption after 60 minutes of inactivity. You can lengthen or shorten the
time that the printer remains idle before it reduces its power consumption.
Once the printer turns down its power, it will need to warm up again before
printing the next document. You or other network users may experience a
small delay (3 minutes) in printing.
1
Open the Printer Preferences category.
You see a list of preferences.
2
Open the Energy Saving Delay category.
3
In the panel that appears, choose a time interval from the pop-up menu.
Choose a time interval
from this pop-up menu.
4
60
Chapter 2
To send the energy-saving delay setting to the printer, click Send.
Setting paper-handling options
When the standard paper cassette runs out of paper, the Color LaserWriter
12/600 PS can automatically switch and use paper from another paper source,
such as the multipurpose tray (if you tell the printer that the tray contains the
same size paper). This lets you continue printing without reloading paper. If
you have the optional 250-sheet feeder, and it contains the same size paper,
automatic tray switching includes it as a paper source. Combining all three
paper sources lets you print up to 600 sheets without reloading paper.
1
Open the Job Defaults category.
You see a list of job default categories.
2
Open the Paper Handling category.
3
In the panel that appears, click the checkbox to turn Automatic Tray Switching on or off.
An X means the
printer looks for paper
in any available paper
source (including the
multipurpose tray
when the paper size
matches).
4
Choose the size of paper in
the multipurpose tray.
(If you print jobs that use a
different size paper, the printer
avoids the multipurpose tray.)
Use the pop-up menu to choose a default paper size for the multipurpose tray.
If you turn on the automatic tray switching feature (in step 3), the printer
draws paper from any paper source that holds the correct size paper.
However, the printer is not able to detect the size of paper you may have
placed in the multipurpose tray, so you must tell it. If the paper size for the
multipurpose tray is the same as the paper in the standard paper cassette (and
automatic tray switching is turned on), the printer automatically uses the
multipurpose tray as a paper source.
5
To send the paper-handling settings to the printer, click Send.
Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users
61
Setting up job handling
You can set job handling for individual network protocols that you use. If you
need to shut down the printer in the middle of printing a document, you can
use this panel to make sure the printer finishes the job before closing the
connection.
1
Open the Job Defaults category.
You see a list of network options.
2
Open the Job Handling Configuration category.
3
Click the checkboxes next to the network types to specify when the connection with the
computer should be broken.
With this feature on, the printer keeps the connection open until the last page
of a job has printed. That way, if a problem develops at the end of the print
job, the printer can send error messages to alert users to the problem. Turning
the feature on does make the total print time for the job somewhat longer, and
the printer prints jobs serially.
An X in a checkbox
means the printer
prints all pages in a
job before closing
the connection
with the computer
that requested
the print job.
4
62
Chapter 2
To send the job-handling configuration settings to the printer, click Send.
Setting the printer’s error timeout
Occasionally, a user may send a job to the printer, then experience a computer
problem, such as a power failure. Other users with print jobs in the queue
must wait until the printer cancels the problem job. Use the I/O Error
Timeout panel to tell the printer how long to wait before going on to print the
next job in the queue.
1
Open the Communication Configuration category.
You see a list of communication settings options.
2
Open the I/O Error Timeout category.
3
In the panel that appears, choose the time you want the printer to wait.
Choose a time interval
from the pop-up menu.
Select a time for each
interface you use with
the printer.
4
To send the settings to the printer, click Send.
Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users
63
Setting the printer’s network zones
You can specify the AppleTalk network zone that the printer will be
accessible in.
1
Open the Communication Configuration category.
You see a list of communication settings options.
2
Open the Printer’s Zone category.
3
In the panel that appears, select the zone you want the printer to appear in.
Select the zone
you want.
4
64
Chapter 2
To send the zone setting to the printer, click Send.
Viewing the Ethernet address
You can view the printer’s Ethernet address when needed.
1
Open the Communication Configuration category.
You see a list of communication settings options.
2
Open the Ethernet Address category.
The printer’s
Ethernet address
appears.
Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users
65
Working with a NetWare network
If the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS is connected to a NetWare network, you
can use the Apple Printer Utility on a Macintosh to configure NetWare
settings in the printer.
1
Open the Communication Configuration category.
You see a list of communication settings options.
2
Open the NetWare Configuration category.
What you see in the panel depends on whether you have set up the printer as
a remote printer (RPrinter) or a print server (PServer) in NetWare.
When you set up the printer as a remote printer, the panel below appears.
If the printer is a
remote printer on the
NetWare network,
click RPrinter.
Type the printer’s name here.
If you choose RPrinter, this area
of the panel is dimmed.
66
Chapter 2
When you set up the printer as a print server, the panel below appears.
If the printer is a print
server on the
NetWare network,
click PServer.
Type the printer’s name here.
Type the PServer printer
password here.
(It must match the password
you assigned in the NetWare
setup procedure.)
NetWare print
servers that have
access to the printer
appear here.
To determine how
often the printer
checks print queues
for print jobs, use this
pop-up menu.
3
To remove a print server from
the access list, click its name,
then click Remove.
To add a print server to the access
list, click Add. In the dialog box that
appears, type the print server’s name
and click Send.
To send the changes to the printer, click Send.
Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users
67
Changing TCP/IP configurations
You can specify the IP address of the printer. For information about
determining the printer’s IP address and setting up the printer on a TCP/IP
network, see Chapter 4.
1
Open the Communication Configuration category.
You see a list of communication settings options.
2
Open the TCP/IP Configuration category.
3
In the panel that appears, make the changes you want.
Drag the slider to
change the printer’s
subnet mask.
Type the IP address here.
IP address of the default
gateway used for sending
packets off the local network
The IP address and
subnet mask of hosts
that have access to
this printer appear
here. (No more than
16 in the list.)
To remove a host or network of hosts from the
access list, click its name, then click Remove.
68
Chapter 2
To add to the list, click Add.
For information about the dialog box that
appears, see the next page.
When you click the Add button in the TCP/IP Configuration panel, this dialog
box appears:
When you’ve made the changes
you want, click Send. The changes are
sent immediately.
m To allow printing from all hosts on the same subnet as the printer, choose
Local and specify the printer’s subnet mask.
m To add a particular host to the list, choose Individual and type the host’s IP
address.
m To allow printing from all hosts on a different subnet, choose Group. Then
type the IP address of a host on that subnet and move the slider to specify
the group’s subnet mask.
4
To send the changes to the printer, click Send.
Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users
69
Viewing and changing communication settings
If you don’t need all of the printer’s communication settings for your network
environment, you can turn unnecessary settings off with the Apple Printer
Utility.
For more information about connecting the printer to LocalTalk, Ethernet,
and parallel ports, see “Connecting the Printer” in Chapter 1.
1
On the printer, make sure the configuration switch is in the right-hand position.
This is the normal setting and prepares the printer to accept the changes you
send. You should leave the switch in the right-hand position unless you need
to reset the ports and cannot use the Apple Printer Utility to do it. (For
example, if you inadvertently turn off communication to all ports.)
Configuration
switch
2
On your Macintosh, open the Apple Printer Utility.
3
Open the Communication Configuration category.
You see a list of communication settings options.
4
70
Chapter 2
Open the Port Configuration category.
5
In the panel that appears, you can change settings if you need to.
For example, if you know that the printer will never receive a NetWare
message over the network, you can turn off the NetWare interface and stop
the printer from sending out unnecessary NetWare packets.
To see the original settings, click
Default. Then, if you want to
reset the ports to the original
settings, click Send.
You cannot change the
LocalTalk setting.
To change the
settings for these
ports, use the
pop-up menus.
You can leave these ports on
(the default) or turn them off.
If you use Apple Print Monitor
for Windows and the PostScript
LaserWriter Driver 3.0 together
over the parallel port, make sure
Data is set to AutoSelect.
6
To send the changes to the printer, click Send.
This implements the new settings. You can alert users about the changes.
IMPORTANT As long as you leave the printer’s configuration switch in the
right-hand position, the printer uses the settings in this panel. If for any
reason you need to return to the original, default settings, click the Default
button. If you cannot use the Apple Printer Utility to reset the ports, flip the
configuration switch to the left-hand position. Then restart the printer and
return the switch to the right-hand position.
Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users
71
Sending PostScript files to the printer
You can download PostScript files to the printer to print a PostScript program
or Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file, or to run a PostScript program to
change the internal settings of the printer. You can create a PostScript file in a
variety of text-editing programs or by printing any document to a file (just
click the File button in the Print dialog box).
1
Choose Send File from the File menu.
2
In the Send File dialog box, select the PostScript file that you want to send to the printer.
3
Click Add.
4
Click Send.
Restarting the printer
If you have any problems printing, you may need to restart the printer to clear
its memory.
1
Choose Restart Printer from the Utilities menu.
If you have changes you haven’t sent to the printer, a dialog box appears
warning that any fonts that have been downloaded to the printer’s memory
will be lost.
2
To confirm that you want to restart the printer, click Restart.
When the printer lights stop blinking, the printer is ready to print.
You can achieve the same effect by physically turning the printer on and off
again.
IMPORTANT If the printer is on a network, make sure no one is attempting to
use the printer when you restart it. If someone’s printing job is canceled, they
must resubmit it.
72
Chapter 2
Getting Macintosh users started using the printer
As soon as you connect the printer to the network, it’s ready to use. In
preparing to print on it, Macintosh users follow the same basic steps that you
did to install the software and set up the printer. Each user
m installs the printer software and fonts on the Macintosh
m selects and sets up the printer from the Chooser
Instructions for users
Chapter 6 explains to users how to install the software from the disks that
came with the printer.
In addition, you’ll need to give users information specific to your network:
m the name of the AppleTalk zone on which the printer is located
m the name you gave the printer if you renamed it with the Apple Printer
Utility
Software for users
If you’d prefer not to pass around the software disks, you can place the
software on a server, as explained in the next section. If you prefer, you can of
course install the software on each user’s computer yourself.
Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users
73
Preparing a server so users can install over a network
If you want users to install their software from a network server rather than
pass around the original Macintosh floppy disks, you must copy the disks to a
server as follows:
1
Create a new folder on the server and name it (for example, Network Install).
2
Insert Printer Disk 1 for Macintosh.
3
Drag the Printer Disk 1 icon onto the icon of the folder.
IMPORTANT You must drag the disk icon rather than copying the contents of
the disk directly.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each Macintosh printer disk.
5
Open the folder you created in step 1.
The contents of each disk are contained in a folder named for that disk.
6
Open the Printer Disk 1 folder.
7
Click to select the Installer and Installer Script icons and drag the icons from the Printer
Disk 1 folder to the folder you created in step 1.
The Installer and the Installer Script need to be in the same window as the
folders for the disks you copied.
IMPORTANT Be sure to tell the users in your group where to find the software
and the name of the folder to look for on the server.
74
Chapter 2
Installing the printer software from the server
After you’ve copied the software to the server as described in “Preparing a
Server so Users Can Install Over a Network” earlier in this chapter, users can
install the software on their own computers by following these steps:
1
Turn off any automatic virus-detection programs on your Macintosh before installing the
software.
If you don’t, problems may occur during the installation. After installation is
complete, you can turn the virus-detection programs back on. (For
instructions on turning off each virus-detection program, see the manual that
came with the program, or telephone the manufacturer of the program.)
2
Log on to the server from the computer where you want to install the software.
3
Open the folder that contains the printer software.
4
Double-click the Installer icon.
A dialog box opens to describe the installation.
5
Click the Continue button to close the dialog box.
6
Click the Install button.
The Installer takes a few moments to calculate what needs to be done and
then begins to install files.
7
Follow the instructions on the screen until the installation is complete.
After the installation, the Installer tells you to restart your computer.
8
Click the Restart button.
The software is now installed and the printer is ready for use. If you turned
off any automatic virus-detection programs on your Macintosh, turn them
back on now. After installing the printer software, you need to set it up to use
the printer. See “Selecting and Setting Up the Printer” in Chapter 6.
Setting Up the Printer for Macintosh Users
75
What to do next
The printer is now set up on your AppleTalk network. If you want to install
any options, see Chapter 5. To learn how to print from a Macintosh computer,
see Chapter 6. To set up the printer for Windows users, see Chapter 3. To set
up the printer for UNIX users, see Chapter 4.
76
Chapter 2
3
Setting Up the Printer for Windows
and NetWare Users
This chapter describes how to set up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS for use
with IBM PCs or compatible computers running Windows or DOS. It
provides detailed procedures for setting up the printer for use on a Novell
NetWare network and instructions for installing and using Apple Print
Monitor for Windows and the Apple Printer Utility for Windows, provided
with your printer.
System requirements
To use the printer, your computer system must meet these requirements:
m IBM PC or compatible, with an 80386 or higher CPU
m hard disk drive
m at least 4 megabytes (MB) of random-access memory (RAM)
m Microsoft Windows 3.1 or higher or Windows for Workgroups 3.11
or higher
m MS-DOS version 3.3 or higher (5.0 or higher recommended)
m 3.5-inch floppy disk drive that reads 1.44 MB disks
m NetWare requires an 80386 CPU with NetWare version 3.0 or higher
m each user of the Apple Printer Utility or Apple Print Monitor must have
NetWare Client Software for Windows 3.12 or 4.x installed
Installing all the printer software for the IBM PC or compatible computer
requires approximately 3.5 MB of free space on your hard disk.
77
Before you begin
Set up the printer as described in Chapter 1, remembering to
m unpack and prepare the printer
m connect the printer to your NetWare network using Ethernet cables or
through a direct parallel connection to a PC (To connect the printer directly
to your IBM PC or compatible computer, you must use a special parallel
interface cable, part number M4235ZM/A, available separately from your
Apple dealer.)
m plug in and turn on the printer (Keep the startup page that automatically
prints out. It provides the default printer name you need for setup.)
Installing the software the printer administrator needs
As the printer administrator, you must install the printer software on each
computer that will print to the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS. To do this, use
the installation program that comes on the software disks included with the
printer.
The instructions that follow assume that you have a mouse or similar pointing
device.
1
Find the Windows disks that came with the printer and make sure they’re writeprotected.
Slide up the write-protection tab in one corner of the floppy disk so that you
can see through the hole.
2
Start Windows.
Before installing the software, make sure the Windows Control Panel and
Printers control panel are closed.
3
78
Chapter 3
Insert Printer Disk 1 for Windows into a floppy disk drive.
4
Read the README.TXT file on this disk to check for late-breaking news.
You can do this with Windows Notepad or another word processor.
5
From the Windows Program Manager, choose Run from the File menu.
6
Type a:\setup or b:\setup (depending on which drive holds your installation
disk) in the command line field and click OK.
After a few moments, a welcome message is displayed that allows you to
select Express Installation, Custom Installation, or De-Install.
Express Installation installs all the software you need. It creates the Apple
LaserWriter Software program group and installs within it the ReadMe file,
Apple Print Monitor for Windows and the Apple Printer Utility for Windows,
which you use to name the printer and perform various printer administrative
functions. It also installs Adobe Type Manager™ with Type 1 fonts
corresponding to the fonts in the printer’s ROM.
Custom Installation lets you specify what portions of the software you would
like to install. De-Install lets you remove previously installed LaserWriter
software.
7
Click Express Installation.
A window appears that keeps you informed as file decompression proceeds.
Insert other printer disks (and click OK) as the program asks for them.
Instructions appear describing the next three steps in the installation
procedure. Take a moment to read them.
8
Click Continue.
The Adobe Printers control panel appears.
9
Select the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS and click OK.
The PostScript Printer Driver files and other software are installed on the
hard disk. A message appears telling you that the driver software was
successfully installed.
10
Click OK to dismiss the message.
Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users
79
11
Select another Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS printer, if any, and click OK to install. Repeat
for each printer you want to install.
12
When you’re done, click Close.
A message appears telling you to use the Printers control panel to connect
and set up the printers you’ve installed. By default, each printer uses LPT1.
The Printers control panel Setup dialog lets you specify a different port, for
example, LPT2, or a NetWare queue.
13
Click OK to clear the message.
Another message tells you that installation is complete.
14
Click Restart Windows to have the changes take effect.
The Apple LaserWriter Software program group now appears on your
Windows Program Manager screen. Contained within the program group are
the ReadMe file, Apple Print Monitor for Windows, and the Apple Printer
Utility for Windows.
15
Choose how to proceed:
For users connected via the parallel cable, the default printer driver settings
should suffice.
You can monitor your printer software with Apple Print Monitor for
Windows; see the section “Initial Apple Print Monitor for Windows Setup,”
later in this chapter.
For instructions on using the Apple Printer Utility for Windows, see “Setting
Additional Parameters With the Apple Printer Utility for Windows,” later in
this chapter.
To configure your printer software with NetWare, see “Initial Novell NetWare
Setup,” later in this chapter.
80
Chapter 3
Installing software for Windows NT
The steps to install the PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file for the Color
LaserWriter 12/600 PS (or other Apple printer) on a Windows NT system are
similar to those in the previous section, except that you select Custom Install
(step 7) and click “Windows NT Printer Software.” Make sure the other
checkboxes are deselected, then follow these steps:
1
Click Install. Instructions for installing the WIndows NT software appear.
2
Click Continue. The Print Manager appears.
3
Choose Create Printer from the Print Manager’s Printer menu. The Create Printer dialog
box appears.
4
Select Other (at the bottom of the list) in the Driver Combo box.
5
Insert Printer Disk 3 for Windows in the floppy disk drive.
6
Make sure the correct floppy disk drive is indicated in the Install Driver dialog box and
click OK. A list of printer drivers appears.
7
Select the printer driver that corresponds to your printer and click OK.
8
Follow the instructions on the screen, and click Continue and OK to complete the
installation.
Using Apple Print Monitor
You can monitor your print jobs on an Ethernet network with Apple Print
Monitor for Windows. Here are a few points to note:
m Apple Print Monitor for Windows lets print jobs be sent directly to the
printer over the network. Apple Print Monitor is easy to use and makes a
NetWare print server (but not a NetWare file server) unnecessary.
m Apple Print Monitor can be used only on systems with Windows 3.1 or 3.11
(or Windows for Workgroups 3.1 or 3.11).
m Apple Print Monitor coexists with NetWare.
You can also monitor your print jobs over a direct parallel connection with
Apple Print Monitor; see the instructions in the next section. If you want to
use NetWare, see “Initial Novell NetWare Setup,” later in this chapter.
Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users
81
Initial Apple Print Monitor for Windows setup
This section provides instructions on using Apple Print Monitor on an
Ethernet network or with a parallel connection.
1
Double-click the Apple Print Monitor icon located in the Apple LaserWriter Software
program group.
2
In the Apple Print Monitor window, click Select Printer.
3
In the Select Printer window that appears, make sure the Network button is selected.
Or, if you connected the printer to your computer via the parallel port, click
the Parallel Port button.
4
In the list of printers that appears in the bottom of the window, click the Color
LaserWriter 12/600 PS printer you want to use.
5
Click OK.
Apple Print Monitor is now monitoring your print jobs to the printer.
6
In the Apple Print Monitor window, click the Monitor Options button.
The button appears on the right side of the window.
7
In the Options window that appears, make the selections you want.
To be notified when one of your documents starts
to print and finishes printing, check this box.
If you want a status window to open
automatically whenever there’s a printing
problem, check this box.
To be alerted by a beep when there’s
a printing problem, check this box.
82
Chapter 3
8
Click OK and return to the Apple Print Monitor window.
9
Click the Minimize button in the Apple Print Monitor window.
Clicking this button shrinks the window to an icon, leaving Apple Print
Monitor running in memory.
To set some additional features of the printer software, see “Setting Additional
Printer Parameters With the Apple Printer Utility for Windows,” later in this
chapter.
Repeat these steps on each client computer that will be using Apple Print
Monitor.
Making sure everything is working
After you’ve configured Apple Print Monitor for Windows, open a Windows
application (Notepad, for example) and print a document (such as the
ReadMe file) to verify that you can print to the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS.
Initial Novell NetWare setup
This section provides instructions on setting up the Color LaserWriter 12/600
PS for operation on a Novell NetWare network.
Make sure that the NetWare network is set up and operating according to the
instructions in the Novell NetWare documentation.
You should have access to the NetWare Printer Console utility, PCONSOLE,
on the PC from which you will be setting up the printer and have the
administrative privileges necessary to make changes to the network.
Note: The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS automatically determines the
Ethernet frame type used by NetWare for network communications. You do
not need to configure frame type when setting up the printer.
Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users
83
IMPORTANT The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS is a PostScript printer only. If
you are using NetWare 4.x, use PostScript banner pages only. If you use
another type of banner page, the banner will not print. Do not use banner
pages at all with NetWare 3.x. If you do, the banner will not print.
Step 1: Choosing an operating mode
When setting up your printer for a NetWare network, you have a choice of
three operating modes:
m PSERVER mode, in which the printer emulates NetWare’s PSERVER
software and functions as a dedicated print server
m RPRINTER mode, in which the printer functions as a remote printer
m ATPS (AppleTalk Print Spooler) mode, in which the printer functions as a
remote AppleTalk printer
In PSERVER mode, the factory default, print jobs are stored in a queue on a
specified file server and retrieved by the printer.
In RPRINTER mode, the printer depends on the NetWare print server
software—either a NetWare Loadable Module (NLM), an RPRINTER.EXE
executable file, or a value-added process (VAP) running on top of the
operating system—to manage printing. Print jobs are stored in a queue on a
specified file server. When the printer is ready to print the job, the NetWare
print server software copies the job to the printer.
In ATPS mode, the printer uses its AppleTalk protocol support to
communicate with the Novell ATPS NetWare Loadable Module (NLM). The
NLM (included in the NetWare for Macintosh package from Novell) extends
full queue and spooling services to Macintosh clients from a server-based
software process.
There are advantages to each type of operating mode. Your choice will
depend on your networking environment and the types of jobs you will be
printing. Regardless of your choice, you can locate the printer anywhere on
the network.
84
Chapter 3
What to do next
Once you decide how you want to set up the printer, proceed as follows:
m PSERVER To set up the printer as a print server, read about how to use
PCONSOLE in the next section, then
m if you want a simple setup, read “Step 2, Option A: Setting Up the
Printer as a Print Server (Using PCONSOLE),” later in this chapter.
m if you want to assign a password, read “Step 3: Assigning a Password for
the Print Server (Optional),” later in this chapter.
m RPRINTER To set up the printer as a remote printer, read about how to use
PCONSOLE in the next section, then skip to “Step 2, Option B: Setting Up
the Printer as a Remote Printer (RPRINTER Mode),” later in this chapter.
For both PSERVER and RPRINTER, you must also follow the instructions in
“Step 4: Setting Up the PostScript Printer Driver for NetWare,” later in this
chapter.
For more information about using the Apple Printer Utility, read “Setting
Additional Parameters With the Apple Printer Utility for Windows,” later in
this chapter.
For instructions on setting up the printer for access by Macintosh clients on a
NetWare network, see Appendix B.
Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users
85
Using PCONSOLE
PCONSOLE is a DOS-based utility for configuring printers on a NetWare
network. This chapter provides information on the set of basic PCONSOLE
operations required to set up the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS. PCONSOLE is
not provided with the printer. It comes with your NetWare software. Detailed
information about PCONSOLE can be found in your NetWare
documentation.
The descriptions of PCONSOLE in this guide assume the use of keyboard
commands to navigate through the program and perform operations. With the
installation of a DOS mouse driver, you can also use a mouse to make
selections and choose options. The table below lists some basic PCONSOLE
key commands.
86
Chapter 3
Command key
Description
Esc (Escape)
Returns to the previous level
Del (Delete)
Deletes a selected item
F7
Cancels changes
Alt-F10
Exits the program
Ins (Insert)
Inserts a new item for a list
F1
Displays online help
Arrow keys
Cycle through menu selections or entry fields
Step 2, option A: Setting up the printer as a print server
(using PCONSOLE)
To set up your printer as a print server you must run PCONSOLE under DOS
to specify the print server (PSERVER mode) and create a print queue.
IMPORTANT The procedures in this section are specific for a version of
PCONSOLE running under NetWare 4.02. If you are running PCONSOLE
under NetWare 4.1 or NetWare 3.x, the menus and commands will differ
somewhat.
Specifying a print server
Your first task is to start PCONSOLE and specify the Color LaserWriter
12/600 PS as the print server.
1
Log in to a file server from DOS on a client computer.
IMPORTANT You must have supervisor or equivalent privileges to create a print
server.
2
At the DOS prompt, type PCONSOLE and press Enter.
The utility starts.
3
Press F4.
This changes PCONSOLE to bindery mode, and the Available Options menu
appears, displaying printer console options.
Print Queues
Print Servers
Quick Setup
Change Current NetWare Server
Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users
87
4
Use the arrow keys to highlight Print Servers in the menu, and press Enter.
If available, a list of print servers appears.
Example
APPLE_LW6C4B3D
APPLE_LWF40B99
APPLE_LWF40B8D
APPLE_LWF40BE9
5
Press Ins, then type the NetWare printer name (provided on the printer’s startup page)
and press Enter.
The last six digits in the NetWare printer name are from the printer’s Ethernet
address.
The new name now appears in the list of available print servers.
IMPORTANT If multiple file servers are to be serviced by a single printer, this
name must be the same on each file server.
Assigning the operating mode
Now that you’ve named the printer in PCONSOLE, you assign PSERVER
mode to the printer by specifying the mode and the name you want to assign
to the printer for notification purposes.
1
If it is not already selected, select the name of the print server you specified in the
previous procedure and press Enter.
The Print Server Information menu appears, listing options for specifying the
printer.
Printers
Information and Status
Users
Operators
Serviced NetWare Servers
Description
Password
Audit
88
Chapter 3
2
Select Printers and press Enter.
The Defined Printers list appears.
3
Press Ins, then type a name for the printer and press Enter.
Choose a useful name associated with the printer’s location or other
identifying feature.
4
Select the printer you just named and press Enter.
The Printer Configuration menu for your printer appears.
5
Select “Printer type” and press Enter.
The “Printer type” list appears.
6
Choose Other/Unknown from the list, and press Enter.
Ethernet falls into the Other/Unknown category.
7
If you are using NetWare 4.x, select Banner Type and press Enter. When the Banner Type
list appears, select PostScript and press Enter.
8
To save the changes, press Esc once, then press Enter.
9
Press Esc three times to return to the Available Options menu.
Now that the print server is specified and an operating mode is selected, you
need to create a print queue and associate it with the print server, as
described in the next section.
Creating a print queue and associating it with the print server
In this section you will create a print queue to associate with the printer.
1
In the Available Options menu, select Print Queues and press Enter.
The Print Queues window appears, listing currently existing queues (if any
exist).
2
Press Ins to create a new print queue.
3
At the prompt, type the new queue name and press Enter.
The new queue name now appears in the list of print queues.
Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users
89
4
If the new queue name is not already selected, use the arrow keys to highlight the queue
name and press Enter.
The Print Queue Information menu appears, displaying options for managing
the print queue.
Print Jobs
Status
Attached Print Servers
Information
Users
Operators
Print Servers
5
In the Print Queue Information menu, select Print Servers and press Enter.
The Print Servers window appears. Because you have not yet assigned a
server to the queue, the listing should be empty.
6
Press Ins to view a list of available queue servers.
The Print Server Candidates menu appears, listing candidates for queue
servers.
7
Select the name of the print server you created earlier and press Enter.
The selected server now appears in the Print Servers window, indicating that
the queue is now associated with that server.
8
Press Esc until PCONSOLE quits.
You will be asked to confirm your exit from PCONSOLE by pressing Enter.
9
90
Chapter 3
Turn the printer off and then back on.
Completing the PSERVER configuration with the Apple Printer Utility
1
Start Windows, if it’s not already running.
2
In the Program Manager window, open the Apple LaserWriter Software program group
and double-click the Apple Printer Utility icon.
3
Click Network.
4
Select the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS printer you want, then click Open Printer.
5
Select Communication Configuration.
6
Select NetWare Configuration.
7
Enter the PSERVER name (the same printer name you used in PCONSOLE, if you are not
using the default name).
8
Click the Rescan button.
Rescan sends the new settings to the printer and causes it to renew its
communications with the NetWare file server.
The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS is now ready to function as a print server
on the NetWare network.
What to do next: The next section covers setting up the printer as a remote
printer. If you want to assign a password on the server, skip to “Step 3:
Assigning a Password for the Print Server (Optional).” Otherwise, skip to
“Step 4: Setting Up the PostScript Printer Driver for NetWare.”
Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users
91
Step 2, option B: Setting up the printer as a remote printer
(RPRINTER mode)
To configure your printer as a remote printer, you must use PCONSOLE to
specify the print server that will provide service to your printer, create a print
queue (if necessary), and associate a print queue with the print server. You
must also use the Apple Printer Utility to set up the printer as a remote
printer.
IMPORTANT The procedures in this section are specific for a version of
PCONSOLE running under NetWare 4.02. If you are running PCONSOLE
under NetWare 4.1 or NetWare 3.x, the menus and commands will differ
slightly.
Specifying a print server
1
Log in to a file server from a DOS client PC.
IMPORTANT You must have supervisor or equivalent privileges to select a print
server.
2
At the DOS prompt, type PCONSOLE and press Enter.
The utility starts and the Available Options menu appears, displaying printer
console options.
Print Queues
Printers
Print Servers
Quick Setup
Change Context
3
Use the arrow keys to highlight Print Servers in the menu and press Enter.
If available, a list of available print servers appears.
4
Select a print server or, if the print server does not yet exist, press Ins, type the print
server name, and press Enter.
IMPORTANT The print server name you enter in PCONSOLE must match a
print server NLM, VAP, or a RPRINTER.EXE stored on a dedicated
computer.
92
Chapter 3
5
In the Print Server menu, select the print server you want to use and press Enter.
The Print Server Information menu appears.
Printers
Information and Status
Users
Operators
Description
Password
Audit
6
Select Printers and press Enter.
The Defined Printers menu appears, displaying options for configuring the
print server.
7
Select a printer or, if there is no defined printer, press Ins, type the printer’s name, and
press Enter.
8
Select a printer and press Enter.
A configuration window for the selected printer appears.
10
If necessary, type an unassigned printer number for your printer and press Enter.
A Configuration window appears for the selected printer.
11
Press the down arrow key to move to the “Printer type” field and press Enter.
A menu of printer types appears.
12
From the list of printer types, select Other/Unknown and press Enter.
Other/Unknown now appears in the Type field of the Configuration window.
13
Press the down arrow key to move to the “Banner type” field and press Enter.
14
From the list of Available Banner Types, select Postscript and press Enter.
IMPORTANT If you are running PCONSOLE under NetWare 3.x, you must
disable banners, or the print job will not print. See “Banner Pages and
NetWare,” near the end of this chapter.
Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users
93
15
Press Esc once to save the configuration.
PCONSOLE asks you to confirm the new configuration.
16
Select Yes and press Enter to confirm the changes.
The newly defined printer now appears in the list of configured printers.
17
Press Esc until you return to the Print Servers menu.
Now that the print server is specified, you need to create a print queue to
associate with the print server.
Creating a print queue
1
In the Available Options menu of PCONSOLE, select Print Queues and press Enter.
The Print Queues window appears, listing the names of existing print queues.
2
Press Ins to create a new print queue.
3
At the prompt, type a new queue name and press Enter.
The new print queue now appears in the list.
4
With the new queue name selected, press Enter.
The Print Queue Information menu appears.
5
In the Print Queue Information menu, select Print Servers and press Enter.
A list of queue servers appears.
6
Press Ins to view a list of queue server candidates.
7
Select the name of the logical print server that was specified earlier (“Specifying a Print
Server”) and press Enter.
The name of the server now appears in the Print Servers list.
8
Press Esc until you return to the Available Options menu.
Now that the print queue exists, you must associate it with the print server
you specified earlier.
94
Chapter 3
Associating a print server with the print queue
After you’ve created a new print queue, you need to associate the print server
with the queue.
1
In the Available Options menu of PCONSOLE, select Printers and press Enter.
The Print Servers menu appears, displaying the names of existing print
servers.
2
Select the printer you defined earlier and press Enter.
A window appears, showing the printer configuration.
3
Select Print Queues Assigned and press Enter.
The NetWare Server/Print Queue appears. It should list the printer number
you specified in an earlier procedure.
4
Press Ins to view a list of available queues.
5
Select the queue you created in the earlier procedure and press Enter.
The Priority dialog box appears, prompting you to enter a priority number for
the queue.
6
Type a priority number between 1 and 10 in the provided field and press Enter.
PCONSOLE identifies the file server, the queue associated with the print
server, and the queue’s priority number.
7
Press Esc until PCONSOLE prompts you to press Enter to quit; then press Enter.
You must now reload the PSERVER software (if it previously existed) from
the file server console so that the updated configuration is available to the
network. (If no PSERVER software was previously loaded, skip to step 9.)
8
At the server prompt, type unload pserver print_server and press Enter.
Example
unload pserver PS_486
Now that the PSERVER software is unloaded, you can reload it with the new
settings.
Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users
95
9
Type load pserver print_server and press Enter.
Example
load pserver PS_486
10
Restart the printer (by turning it off and on or using the Apple Printer Utility).
Next, you’ll use the Apple Printer Utility to complete the configuration.
Completing the RPRINTER configuration with the Apple Printer Utility
1
Start Windows, if it’s not already running.
2
In the Program Manager window, open the Apple LaserWriter Software program group
and double-click the Apple Printer Utility icon.
3
Click Network.
4
Click the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS printer you want, then click Open Printer.
5
Select Communication Configuration.
6
Select NetWare Configuration.
7
Select RPRINTER.
8
Enter the name of the print server NLM in the Connect Print Server Name field.
9
Click Send.
The printer is ready to function as a remote printer on the NetWare network.
What to do next: If you want to assign a password on the server, go to “Step 3:
Assigning a Password for the Print Server (Optional).” Otherwise, skip to
“Step 4: Setting Up the PostScript Printer Driver for NetWare.”
96
Chapter 3
Step 3: Assigning a password for the print server (optional)
You can use PCONSOLE to assign a password for printing privileges.
However, if you assign a password in PCONSOLE, you must also use the
Apple Printer Utility for Windows to specify the same password, as described
in “Setting Additional Parameters With the Apple Printer Utility for
Windows,” later in this chapter. (The password specified in PCONSOLE tells
the file server what to expect; the password specified with the Apple Printer
Utility tells the printer what to send.)
1
Select Print Servers from the Available Options menu in PCONSOLE and press Enter.
The list of print servers appears.
2
Select the name of the print server for which you want to assign a password and press
Enter.
The Print Server Information menu appears.
Printers
Information and Status
Users
Operators
Serviced Netware Servers
Description
Password
Audit
3
Select Password and press Enter.
4
At the prompt, type the password and press Enter.
PCONSOLE asks you to retype the password. (The characters are not
displayed as you type.)
5
Retype the password and press Enter.
IMPORTANT Record the password for later use. If multiple file servers will be
served by the same printer, the same password must be used on each server.
6
Press Esc once, then to save the change, press Enter.
7
To return to the Available Options menu, press Esc three times.
Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users
97
Step 4: Setting up the PostScript printer driver for NetWare
1
In Windows, double-click Control Panel.
2
Double-click Printers.
3
Click Connect. The Connect dialog box opens.
4
Click Network. The NetWare Printer Connections dialog box opens.
5
Select the queue and the port the printer is assigned to.
6
Click Capture, then click Close to close the dialog box.
7
Select the port and queue combination you specified in step 5 and click OK.
8
In the Printer control panel, select the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS as the default printer
and click Close.
Step 5: Making sure everything is working
After you’ve used PCONSOLE to configure your printer as a dedicated print
server or a remote printer, you can print, from a Windows application, a
document such as the ReadMe file to verify that you can print to the Color
LaserWriter 12/600 PS.
Step 6: Setting up client computers for network printing
After the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS is set up as a print server or remote
printer on a NetWare network, the client computers must be set up for
printing. You can find detailed installation instructions in Chapter 7. You can
set up all the client computers yourself or give the users the instructions from
Chapter 7. If you ask the users to set up their own computers, be sure you give
them all the information they need, such as the printer’s queue names and
what options are installed.
What to do next
You can set additional printer features as explained in the section “Setting
Additional Parameters With the Apple Printer Utility for Windows,” next.
98
Chapter 3
Setting additional parameters with the Apple Printer Utility for Windows
The printer has default settings for both parallel and Ethernet physical
configurations. If you want to view the printer’s configuration information or
change any of the settings, you must use the Apple Printer Utility.
The printer itself has no control panel, but you can set features on it remotely
by using programs on computers that can communicate with the printer:
m On Macintosh computers, use the Apple Printer Utility and the Chooser’s
setup function, which are described in Chapter 2.
m On IBM PC and compatible computers, use the Apple Printer Utility for
Windows, described in this chapter.
The Apple Printer Utility program lets you change the default settings that
control how various aspects of the printer work. The utility is placed in the
Apple LaserWriter Software program group when the printer software is
installed. Use it to set optional printer parameters that you want to use for all
documents.
To change printer settings for a specific document (without changing the
printer’s basic defaults), use the Print and Print Setup dialog boxes. Network
users should use the Print and Print Setup dialog boxes to choose the
individual settings for their documents.
Use the Apple Printer Utility to
m view information about the printer, such as the AppleTalk printer name and
the total number of pages printed
m give the printer an AppleTalk name
m identify the printer’s location
m print font samples
m turn printing of the startup page or the demonstration page on or off
m conserve power consumption by setting the energy-saving delay
m set paper-handling options
m set when the printer closes print jobs to provide faster throughput
m view the Ethernet address
Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users
99
m name the printer on NetWare networks by assigning it a PSERVER or
RPRINTER name
m assign a password for NetWare networks
m create an access list for TCP/IP and NetWare networks
m view and set the IP address
m view and configure the printer’s communication settings
m send PostScript files to the printer
m restart the printer
IMPORTANT The Apple Printer Utility for Windows works only with the Color
LaserWriter 12/600 PS. When you use the utility to set a parameter, the
setting is stored in the printer and affects all Macintosh, Windows, and UNIX
computers on the network.
Installing the Apple Printer Utility for Windows
The Apple Printer Utility is automatically installed when you do an Express
installation, as described earlier in this chapter.
Opening and quitting the Apple Printer Utility
1
Start Windows, if it’s not already running.
2
Go to the Program Manager window.
3
Open the Apple LaserWriter Software program group.
4
Double-click the Apple Printer Utility icon.
The utility displays the Printer Selector window, listing the printers whose
features you can set.
100
Chapter 3
5
Select New.
6
Select the connection type and the printer you want to work with.
7
When you’re finished using the utility, choose Exit from the File menu.
Selecting the printer
Before you can use the Apple Printer Utility to perform operations on a
printer, you must:
m Select the connection type.
m Select the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS printer you want, then click Open Printer.
Viewing printer information
You can view information about your printer:
m In the Apple Printer Utility program, click the triangle for the Printer Information
category to open it, displaying a list of printer information.
IMPORTANT Triangles point down when a category is open, displaying the
options in the category. Click the triangle (and not the category name) to open
or close a category.
Giving the printer an AppleTalk name
Each Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS can be given an individual name, used for
both AppleTalk and Novell networks. Use the following procedure to give the
printer a new AppleTalk name.
IMPORTANT Be sure to tell users what the printer’s name is.
1
Click the triangle for the Printer Preferences category to open it.
The printer preferences list appears.
2
Open the Name category.
3
In the panel that appears, type the new name.
4
To send the new name setting to the printer, click Send.
Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users
101
Identifying the printer’s physical location
You can type a description of the printer’s location.
1
Click the triangle for the Printer Preferences category.
You see a list of preferences.
2
Open the Location category.
3
In the panel that appears, type a description of the printer’s location.
4
To send the setting to the printer, click Send.
Printing font samples
You can print samples of the PostScript fonts currently stored in the printer’s
memory (both RAM and ROM) and on optional hard disks attached to the
printer.
m Choose Print Font Samples from the File menu.
Turning the startup pages on or off
The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS normally prints a startup page and a
demonstration page when you turn the printer on. The startup page shows the
printer’s name(s), the total number of pages printed, the amount of memory,
and communication settings. You can turn either or both pages off if you
wish.
1
Click on the triangle for the Printer Preferences category.
You see a list of preferences.
2
Open the Startup Pages category.
3
In the panel that appears, click the checkboxes to turn the startup page and
demonstration page on or off.
An X in a checkbox means the printer is set to print the page.
4
102
Chapter 3
To send the setting to the printer, click Send.
Conserving energy
The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS automatically reduces its power
consumption after 60 minutes of inactivity. You can lengthen or shorten the
time that the printer remains idle before it reduces its power consumption.
Once the printer turns down its power, it will need to warm up again before
printing the next document. Network users may experience a delay of up to 3
minutes in printing.
1
Open the Printer Preferences category.
You see a list of preferences.
2
Open the Energy Saving Delay category.
3
In the panel that appears, select a delay time from the list box.
4
To send the setting to the printer, click Send.
Setting paper-handling options
When the printer runs out of paper in one tray, it can automatically switch
and use paper from the paper cassette or multipurpose tray. By using
automatic tray switching between the 250-sheet paper cassette and the 100sheet multipurpose tray, you can print 350 sheets without reloading paper.
You can also tell the printer what size paper is in the multipurpose tray. Then,
if you print a job that uses a different size paper, the printer will not use this
tray.
1
Open the Job Defaults category.
You see a list of preferences.
2
Open the Paper Handling category.
3
In the panel that appears, click the checkbox to turn Automatic Tray Switching on or off.
An X in the checkbox means the printer looks for paper in the multipurpose
tray when other paper sources are empty.
Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users
103
4
Use the list box to choose a default paper size for the multipurpose tray.
If you turn on the automatic tray switching feature, the printer draws paper
from any paper source that holds the correct size paper. However, the printer
can’t tell what size paper is in the multipurpose tray, so you must tell it. If the
paper size for the multipurpose tray is the same as the paper in the standard
paper cassette (and automatic tray switching is turned on), the printer
automatically uses the multipurpose tray as a paper source.
5
To send the paper-handling settings to the printer, click Send.
Setting up job handling
You can set job handling for individual network protocols that you use. If you
need to stop the printer in the middle of printing a document, you can use this
feature to make sure the printer finishes the job before closing the connection.
1
Open the Job Defaults category.
You see a list of preferences.
2
Open the Job Handling Configuration category.
3
In the panel that appears, click the checkboxes next to network types to specify when
the connection with the computer should be broken.
With this feature on, the printer keeps the connection open until the last page
of a job has printed. That way, if a problem develops at the end of the print
job, the printer can send error messages to alert users to the problem. Turning
the feature on does make the total print time for the job somewhat longer.
Also, jobs are not overlapped; that is, multiple jobs are printed serially.
4
To send the settings to the printer, click Send.
Viewing the Ethernet address
You can view the printer’s Ethernet address when needed.
1
Open the Communication Configuration category.
You see a list of communication settings options.
2
Open the Ethernet Address category.
The printer’s Ethernet address appears.
104
Chapter 3
Working with a NetWare network
If the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS is connected to a NetWare network, you
can use the Apple Printer Utility for Windows to configure NetWare settings
in the printer.
1
Open the Communication Configuration category.
You see a list of communication settings options.
2
Open the NetWare Configuration category.
What you see in the panel depends on whether you have set up the printer as
a remote printer (RPRINTER) or a print server (PSERVER) in NetWare.
3
For the NetWare RPRINTER setup:
m Click the RPRINTER checkbox.
m Type the printer’s name.
m Click Send to send the changes to the printer.
For the NetWare PSERVER setup:
m Click the PSERVER checkbox.
m Type the printer’s name and PSERVER password (as assigned in NetWare
setup).
m Add print servers to the access list displayed, or remove them, as desired.
m If you like, use the Queue Scan Time text box to change how often the
printer checks print queues for print jobs.
m Click the Rescan button to send the new settings to the printer and to have
it renew its communications with the NetWare file server.
Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users
105
Changing TCP/IP configurations
You can specify the IP address of the printer. For information about
determining the printer’s IP address and setting up the printer on a TCP/IP
network, see Chapter 4.
1
Open the Communication Configuration category.
You see a list of communication settings options.
2
Open the TCP/IP category.
3
In the panel that appears, make the changes you want.
m Type in the printer’s IP address.
m Drag the slider control to specify the printer’s subnet mask.
m Specify the default gateway address, that is, the IP address of the default
gateway used for sending packets off the local network.
m To add to the list of hosts that have acccess to this printer, click Add and
choose Local, Individual, or Group in the dialog box that appears.
m Choose Local to allow printing from all hosts on the same subnet as the
printer.
m Choose Individual to allow printing from a particular host, and specify
the host’s address.
m Choose Group to allow printing from all hosts on a different subnet, and
indicate the group’s subnet mask.
m Click Send to send the changes to the printer.
m To remove a printer from the list of hosts that have acccess to this printer,
click Remove.
4
106
Chapter 3
To send the changes to the printer, click Send.
Viewing and changing communication settings
If you don’t need all of the printer’s communication settings for your network
environment, you can turn unnecessary settings off with the Apple Printer
Utility.
1
On the printer, make sure the configuration switch is in the right-hand (M) position.
2
On the computer, open the Apple Printer Utility.
Configuration
switch
3
Click the triangle to open the Communication Configuration category.
You see a list of communication settings options.
4
Open the Port Configuration category.
5
In the panel that appears, turn off settings you don’t use.
For example, if you know that the printer will never receive an AppleTalk
message over the network, you can turn off the AppleTalk interface and stop
the printer from sending out unnecessary AppleTalk packets.
6
To send the changes to the printer, click Send.
This implements the new settings. You can alert users about the changes.
Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users
107
As long as you leave the configuration switch on the printer in the right-hand
position, the printer uses these settings. If for any reason you need to return to
the original, standard settings, flip the switch back to the left-hand position
and restart the printer. Then, after the printer has powered up, return the
switch to the right-hand position.
Sending PostScript files to the printer
You can download PostScript files to the printer to print a PostScript program
or Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file, or to run a PostScript program to
change the printer’s internal settings. You can create a PostScript file in a
variety of text-editing programs or by printing any document to a file.
1
In the Apple Printer Utility program, choose Send PostScript File from the File menu.
A dialog box appears.
2
In the Send File dialog box, select the PostScript file you want to send to the printer.
3
Click Send.
Restarting the printer
If you have any problems printing, you may need to restart the printer to clear
its memory.
1
Choose Restart Printer from the Utilities menu.
If you have changes you haven’t sent to the printer, a dialog box appears,
asking whether you want to send the changes now.
2
To confirm that you want to restart the printer, click Restart.
When the printer lights stop blinking, the printer is ready to print.
You can achieve the same effect by turning the printer off and then on again.
IMPORTANT If the printer is on a network shared by other users, make sure no
one is attempting to use the printer before you restart it. Any print jobs that
are canceled must be resubmitted.
108
Chapter 3
Banner pages and NetWare
The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS is a PostScript printer only. If you are using
NetWare 4.x, use PostScript banner pages only. If you use another type of
banner page, the banner will not print.
Do not use banner pages at all with NetWare 3.x. If you do, the banner will
not print.
Installed Type 1 fonts and Adobe Type Manager
Among the files installed during an Express Installation (or a Fonts Custom
Install) are the Type 1 font outline (.PFB) files and the Type 1 font metrics
(.PFM) files corresponding to the fonts resident in the printer’s ROM. Also
installed (in the Main program group) is Adobe Type Manager (ATM) and,
within it, the fonts resident in the printer.
You can use the ATM control panel to:
m install and remove additional Type 1 fonts
m change the size of the ATM font cache
m turn ATM off and on
Installing Type 1 fonts
To add Type 1 fonts to your system:
1
Double-click the ATM icon (in the Main program group) to open the ATM control panel.
2
Choose Add to display the Add ATM Fonts dialog box.
3
If you are installing fonts from a floppy disk, insert the disk containing the fonts.
4
In the Directories list box, double-click the drive or directory containing the fonts. The
font names appear in the Available Fonts list.
5
In the Target Directory box for PostScript outline fonts, accept the default directory,
c:\windows\psfonts, or type the name of the directory into which you want to
copy the font files. Any directory name you type will appear in the box labeled “Target
Directory for Font Metrics Files.”
6
Select the fonts you want to add and click Add. Click Exit when you are done.
Setting Up the Printer for Windows and NetWare Users
109
Removing Type 1 fonts
1
In the ATM control panel, select the fonts to be removed.
2
Click Remove.
Changing the size of the ATM font cache
The size of the ATM font cache determines how much system memory is
available to store font information. The default setting is 256K. If you are
using many typefaces or sizes, you may want to increase the font cache size to
improve performance. To do this:
1
Open the ATM control panel.
2
Click the up arrow in the Font Cache box to increase the size, or click the down arrow to
decrease the size.
Turning ATM off or on
ATM is turned on automatically when installed. When it is on, your screen
display uses Type 1 fonts. When it is off, your display uses TrueType fonts.
However, Type 1 fonts print correctly whether or not ATM is on.
To turn ATM on or off, open the ATM control panel and select On or Off.
Then click Exit. Then restart Windows, as prompted, for the change to take
effect.
What to do next
The printer is now set up for Windows and DOS computers. If you want to
install any options, see Chapter 5. To learn how to print from Windows or
DOS computers, see Chapter 7. To set up the printer for UNIX users, see
Chapter 4.
110
Chapter 3
4
Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users
This chapter explains how to prepare the printer for UNIX users. Users’
computers must be connected to the printer by an Ethernet network using
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol).
Before you begin
Set up the printer as described in Chapter 1, remembering to
m unpack and prepare the printer
m connect the printer to your TCP/IP network using Ethernet cables
m plug in and turn on the printer (Keep the startup page that automatically
prints out. It contains information you’ll need.)
111
Initial TCP/IP setup
Before UNIX users can use the printer, the printer administrator must assign
an IP address for the printer, as described in the following sections.
Will these instructions work for my flavor of UNIX?
The instructions in this section describe how to perform the initial TCP/IP
setup for most flavors of UNIX that use the Remote Line Printer Daemon
(lpd) protocol. These include almost all versions of UNIX based on the
Berkeley Software Distribution (BSD), including Apple’s own UNIX
implementation, A/UX.
For information on other systems, see “Notes on Configuring Specific UNIX
Systems,” later in this chapter.
Background information
TCP/IP is a protocol commonly used to connect UNIX systems over Ethernet
networks. Every TCP/IP device must have a unique IP address. Much of the
initial work the printer administrator must do is related to assigning an IP
address (and a number of associated aliases) to the printer.
Security
You can limit printer access to hosts (and networks of hosts) that you specify.
See “Changing TCP/IP Configurations” in Chapter 2, if you’re using the
Apple Printer Utility on a Macintosh, or Chapter 3 if you’re using the Apple
Printer Utility for Windows.
Step 1: Installing the software the printer administrator needs
You don’t need to install any special UNIX software to administer the printer.
To control printer features, you can use the Apple Printer Utility program on
Macintosh computers (see Chapter 2) or Apple Printer Utility for Windows
(see Chapter 3) on IBM PC or compatible computers.
112
Chapter 4
Step 2: Obtaining an IP address for the printer
To be recognized on your TCP/IP network, your printer must be assigned an
IP address. Part of the address identifies your site; the other part uniquely
identifies the device. Most sites have a network administrator who dispenses
IP addresses for all new network devices. Contact your network administrator
for an IP address for the printer.
WARNING If your TCP/IP network contains devices with duplicate or
incorrect IP addresses, you may experience unpredictable network
behavior, or your network may cease to function. Make sure you obtain
a valid and unique IP address for the printer.
Step 3: Assigning an IP address to the printer
When you unpack the printer, it has a unique permanent factory-assigned
Ethernet address, but no IP address. To assign an IP address to the printer,
you can use any one of the following methods, which are described more
fully in the sections that follow:
m Ping assignment Any printer administrator with superuser privileges can
use this method, which is sometimes called “gleaning.” If your network has
neither BOOTP nor RARP services, and you have no access to Windows or
Macintosh computers, you must use this method.
m Macintosh Apple Printer Utility and Apple Printer Utility for Windows If your
network includes a Macintosh computer or Windows computer, you can
use one of these utility programs to set the printer’s IP address.
m BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol) If your network has a BOOTP server, you can
use this method.
m RARP (Remote Address Resolution Protocol) If your network has a RARP
server, you can use this method.
These methods are described in the next three sections. Choose which section
applies to you, and skip the others.
Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users
113
Printer IP address assignment, option A: Using ping assignment
Any printer administrator with superuser privileges can use the ping
assignment method to assign the printer’s IP address and store it in the
printer’s nonvolatile memory (so it remembers the address even when the
printer is turned off).
Note: This method works only when the printer has no IP address. If you’ve
already set the printer’s IP address, you cannot change it by using this
method.
1
Turn on the printer and save the startup page that prints out.
2
Log in as root to any UNIX workstation on the same subnet as the printer.
3
Add the following line to the /etc/hosts table on your workstation:
printer_IP_address
printer_IP_name
You obtain the printer IP address from your network administrator. You
choose the printer IP name yourself (if it was not assigned by the network
administrator). It must follow the naming convention of your system, which
generally means it must contain fewer than 32 characters.
Example
80.20.0.0
4
LaserWriterFloor2
Type the following command to force an entry into your system’s arp table:
arp -s printer_IP_name
printer_Ethernet_address
The printer IP name is the same name you used in step 3. You obtain the
Ethernet address from the startup page that prints automatically when you
turn on the printer. The address appears next to the top icon on the page.
Example
If your startup page showed that your Ethernet address was
08:00:07:2b:48:fb, you would type
arp -s LaserWriterFloor2
114
Chapter 4
08:00:07:2b:48:fb
5
Type the following ping command to store the Printer IP Address in the printer’s
memory:
ping printer_IP_name
The printer IP name is the same name you used in steps 3 and 4.
Example
ping LaserWriterFloor2
The ping command results in a message telling you the printer is alive on
the network.
The address is now stored in the printer’s memory, and you’re ready to test
whether the printer is working.
6
To test the connection, once again type the ping command from a workstation on the
same subnet as the printer:
ping printer_IP_name
If the ping command responds by telling you that the printer is alive on the
network, the address assignment was successful.
If the ping command does not respond, or tells you the printer was not
found, then the address assignment failed. Try the steps in this procedure
again, making sure you type the printer’s Ethernet address exactly as it
appears on the startup page. If it still doesn’t work, see the troubleshooting
suggestions in Chapter 13.
7
Skip to “Step 4: Making Sure Everything Is Working,” later in this chapter.
Printer IP address assignment, option B: Using Macintosh or Windows utilities
If you have a Macintosh computer connected to the printer, you can use the
Apple Printer Utility to assign the printer’s IP address, as described in
Chapter 2.
If you have a Windows computer connected to the printer, you can use the
Apple Printer Utility for Windows to assign the printer’s IP address, as
described in Chapter 3.
After you have assigned the printer’s IP address, skip to “Step 4: Making Sure
Everything Is Working,” later in this chapter.
Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users
115
Printer IP address assignment, option C: Using a BOOTP or RARP server
Note: This method works only if the printer has not been assigned an IP
address.
If your network has a BOOTP server or RARP server on the same subnet as
the printer, you can use it to assign the IP address to the printer. Each time the
printer is turned on, it will automatically broadcast requests to BOOTP and
RARP servers, which will search a configuration file that maps the printer’s
built-in Ethernet address to the IP address that you assign.
IMPORTANT When you use BOOTP or RARP to assign the printer’s IP
address, the address is stored permanently in the printer. The printer uses this
stored address only if the BOOTP or RARP server is not available at a
subsequent boot. Otherwise, each time you turn on the printer it gets its IP
address from the server. If you use the Apple Printer Utility, PostScript, or
ping to set the IP address manually, and later you want to assign the printer’s
IP address using a BOOTP or RARP server, you must first use the Apple
Printer Utility to reset the printer’s IP address to the factory default (0.0.0.0).
If you have a Macintosh computer connected to the printer, you can use the
Apple Printer Utility to assign the printer’s IP address, as described in
Chapter 2.
If you have a Windows computer connected to the printer, you can use the
Apple Printer Utility for Windows to assign the printer’s IP address, as
described in Chapter 3.
Your network documentation explains how to add the printer’s information to
the BOOTP or RARP configuration file.
For troubleshooting information about BOOTP or RARP, see Chapter 13.
116
Chapter 4
Step 4: Making sure everything is working
The best way to make sure everything is set up correctly is to print something.
Before you can do that, you must set up your own workstation for printing, as
described in the steps that follow. The procedure described here is intended
to prepare for printing a sample page as quickly as possible; for more
complete instructions, see “Getting UNIX Users Started Using the Printer,”
later in this chapter.
Preparing your own workstation for printing
1
Add the printer’s IP address and the printer’s IP name to your /etc/hosts file
(if you haven’t already done so).
Use the same IP address and IP name that you assigned to the printer in the
previous section.
2
Add the printer to your /etc/printcap file as a remote printer.
You can add printcap options as you like. (To see the available options,
look at your UNIX system’s man page for printcap.) Your entry should be
similar to the following:
AppleLWTest|[LaserWriter_12_600_PS]:\
:lp=:mx#0:rm=printer_IP_name:\
:rp=printer_queue_name:\
:sd=path_to_this_queue’s_spool_directory:\
:lf=path_to_this_queue’s_log_file
Replace printer_IP_name with the IP name you assigned to the printer.
Replace path_to_this_queue’s_spool_directory with the pathname of the unique
directory created for this queue. Replace path_to_this_queue’s_log_file with
the unique pathname of the file where error information from the lpd
command will be logged.
Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users
117
Example
AppleLWTest|[LaserWriter_12_600_PS]:\
:lp=:mx#0:rm=LaserWriterFloor2:\
:rp=AppleLWTest:\
:sd=/usr/spool/lpd/AppleLWTest:\
:lf=/usr/spool/lpd/printerlog
Note: For a description of some of the parameters in this printcap entry,
see “Getting UNIX Users Started Using the Printer,” later in this chapter.
3
Create and set the privileges for the spool directory specified in step 2.
Example
mkdir
chown
chgrp
chmod
/usr/spool/lpd/AppleLWTest
daemon /usr/spool/lpd/AppleLWTest
daemon /usr/spool/lpd/AppleLWTest
775 /usr/spool/lpd/AppleLWTest
Printing a test page
Use any PostScript file as a test page.
Most UNIX systems use either the lpr or lp command to print
documents over a TCP/IP network. The following commands show examples
of how to print a file named file.postscript to the printer:
Example
lpr -PAppleLWTest file.postscript
If everything is working, the Ready/In Use light on the printer (leftmost of the
indicator lights) will blink, then the pages will print. If there’s a problem, see
Chapter 13 for troubleshooting tips.
Cleaning up the printcap file after testing the printer
You may want to delete the test entry you made in your /etc/printcap
file and instead create a new one as described in “Getting UNIX Users
Started Using the Printer,” later in this chapter.
118
Chapter 4
What to do next
You may configure the printer as explained in the next major section. After
the printer is configured, you can set up users’ workstations as explained in
“Getting UNIX Users Started Using the Printer,” later in this chapter.
Configuring the printer
Though the printer itself has no control panel, you can configure it by using
programs on computers connected to the printer:
m On Macintosh computers, use the Apple Printer Utility and the Chooser’s
setup function, described in Chapter 2.
m On IBM PC or compatible computers, use the Apple Printer Utility for
Windows, described in Chapter 3.
Getting UNIX users started using the printer
As in “Initial TCP/IP Setup,” earlier in this chapter, the instructions in this
section describe how to set up workstations for most flavors of UNIX that use
the Remote Line Printer Daemon (lpd) protocol. These include almost all
versions of UNIX based on the Berkeley Software Distribution (BSD),
including Apple’s own UNIX implementation, A/UX. For information on
other systems, see “Notes on Configuring Specific UNIX Systems,” later in
this chapter.
Commonly, printer administrators make entries in the /etc/hosts and
/etc/printcap files on each user’s workstation to enable them to use the
printer: The /etc/hosts entry identifies the printer’s IP name and address.
The /etc/printcap file identifies different printing parameters.
IMPORTANT This is a PostScript-only printer. If you want to print text files,
you must send them through a PostScript filter such as “enscript” before
printing them.
1
Add the printer’s IP name and IP address to each user’s /etc/hosts file.
Use the same IP address and IP name that you assigned to the printer in
“Step 3: Assigning an IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.
Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users
119
2
Make an entry to each user’s /etc/printcap file.
You can add printcap options as you like. (To see the available options,
look at your system’s man page for printcap.) Each entry should be similar
in form to the following:
local_print_queue_name|[description_of_printer]:\
:lp=:mx#0:rm=printer_IP_name:\
:rp=rlocal_print_queue_name:\
:sd=path_to_this_queue’s_spool_directory:\
:lf=path_to_this_queue’s_log_file:
Fill in the parameters in italics as follows:
m Replace local_print_queue_name with the queue name the user should use
to reference the printer. Typically, queue names indicate the location of the
printer and what sort of files it should be used for.
m Replace description_of_printer with a comment describing the printer.
m Replace printer_IP_name with the IP name you assigned to the printer in
“Step 3: Assigning an IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.
m Replace rlocal_print_queue_name with the queue name the user should use
to reference the local printer.
m Replace path_to_this_queue’s_spool_directory with the pathname of the
unique directory created for this queue.
m Replace path_to_this_queue’s_log_file with the unique pathname of the file
where error information from the lpd command will be logged.
Here’s an example of a printcap entry that allow users to print both text
and other files to the same printer:
Example
KeithsLW|[LaserWriter_12_600_PS]:\
:lp=:mx#0:rm=LaserWriterFloor2:\
:rp=raw:\
:sd=/usr/spool/lpd/KeithsLW:\
:lf=/usr/spool/lpd/printerlog
120
Chapter 4
3
Type the following command to change directories:
cd /usr/spool/lpd
4
Create and set the privileges for the two spool directories specified in step 2, as shown
in this example:
Example
mkdir
chown
chgrp
chmod
KeithsLW
daemon KeithsLW
daemon KeithsLW
775 KeithsLW
Notes on configuring specific UNIX systems
The following sections describe how to configure certain UNIX systems.
Configuring HP-UX version 8.07
1
Assign an IP address and IP name to the printer, as described in “Step 3: Assigning an
IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.
2
Make sure the printer’s IP name and IP address are entered in the /etc/hosts file.
3
Log in to the system console as root.
The System Administration Manager (SAM) uses a screen-oriented interface
that works best at the console.
4
Run the SAM utility by typing sam at the UNIX prompt.
5
Select the following options, in order, from the SAM menu:
Peripheral devices
Printers and Plotters
Actions
Add a Remote Printer (Do not select “Add a Network Printer.”)
A form appears for you to define a remote printer.
Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users
121
6
Enter information into the remote printer form, as follows:
m Printer queue name Type the local queue name users will use as the name for
the printer.
m Remote system name Type the IP name assigned to the printer as described
in “Step 3: Assigning an IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.
m Remote printer queue name Type the local queue name users will use as the
name for the printer.
m Remote cancel model Used for remote printer job removal; type rcmodel
m Remote status model Used for remote printer queue status; type rsmodel
m Make this the system default printer? (y or n) Type y to make this printer the
default printer for all workstations on this segment of the network.
m Printer class Optional
m Restrict cancel Optional
m Remote printer on a BSD system? (y or n) Because this printer is a Berkeleystyle remote printer, type y
7
Choose Perform Task from the SAM menu.
8
To enable the print queue you just created, choose the following items from the SAM
menu, in order:
Peripheral Devices
Printers and Plotters
Enable a Printer
9
When SAM asks for the printer name, type the IP name assigned to the printer as
described in “Step 3: Assigning an IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.
10
Leave SAM.
11
Start the LP request scheduler by typing
/usr/lib/lpsched
12
Test printing with the following command:
lp -d printer_queue_name
122
Chapter 4
filename
If the test print doesn’t work
If the test document doesn’t print, follow these steps:
1
Check whether the rlp daemon is running. At the UNIX prompt, type
ps -e | grep rlp
If the process is running, you will see one or more lines of text; if it is not
running, you will see no response.
2
If rlp is running—that is, you saw one or more lines of text in step 1— kill the process
by typing
kill -15 process_number_from_step_1
3
Make sure the following entry is in the /etc/inetd.conf file:
printer stream tcp nowait root
/usr/lib/rlpdaemon rlpdaemon -i
This line tells inetd to start the rlp daemon automatically when a print
request is made (if it’s not already running).
4
Make sure the following entry is in the /etc/services file:
printer 515/tcp spooler
5
Start inetd by typing the following command at the UNIX prompt:
/etc/inetd -c
6
Repeat the steps in “Configuring HP-UX Version 8.07.”
Configuring HP-UX version 9.xx
1
Assign an IP address and IP name to the printer, as described in “Step 3: Assigning an
IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.
2
Make sure the printer’s IP name and IP address are entered in the /etc/hosts file.
3
Log in to the system console as root.
The System Administration Manager (SAM) uses a screen-oriented interface
that works best at the console.
4
Run the SAM utility by typing sam at the UNIX prompt.
Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users
123
5
Select the following options, in order, from the SAM menu:
Printers and Plotters
Printers/Plotters
Actions
Add a Remote Printer (Do not select “Add a Network Printer.”)
A form appears for you to define a remote printer.
6
Enter information into the remote printer form as follows:
m Printer queue name Type the local queue name users will use as the name
for the printer.
m Remote system name Type the IP name assigned to the printer as described
in “Step 3: Assigning an IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.
m Remote printer queue name Type the local queue name users will use as the
name for the printer.
m Remote cancel model Used for remote printer job removal; type rcmodel
m Remote status model Used for remote printer queue status; type rsmodel
m Printer class Optional
m Make this the system default printer? Check the box to make this printer the
default printer for all workstations on this segment of the network.
m Allow anyone to cancel requests Check this box if anyone should be able to
cancel requests.
m Remote printer on a BSD system? (y or n) Because this printer is a Berkeleystyle remote printer, check this box.
7
Select the OK button.
8
When you see the message “Task completed,” select OK.
9
Pull down the Lists menu and select Exit.
10
Select the Exit SAM button.
11
Test printing with the following command:
lp -d printer_queue_name
124
Chapter 4
filename
If the test print doesn’t work
If the test document doesn’t print, follow these steps:
1
Check whether the rlp daemon is running. At the UNIX prompt, type
ps -e | grep rlp
If the process is running, you will see one or more lines of text; if it is not
running, you will see no response.
2
If rlp is running—that is, you saw one or more lines of text in step 1— kill the process
by typing
kill -15 process_number_from_step_1
3
Make sure the following entry is in the /etc/inetd.conf file:
printer stream tcp nowait root
/usr/lib/rlpdaemon rlpdaemon -i
This line tells inetd to start the rlp daemon automatically when a print
request is made (if it’s not already running).
4
Make sure the following entry is in the /etc/services file:
printer 515/tcp spooler
5
Start inetd by typing the following command at the UNIX prompt:
/etc/inetd -c
6
Repeat the steps in “Configuring HP-UX Version 9.xx.”
Configuring IBM AIX version 3.x
1
Assign an IP address and IP name to the printer, as described in “Step 3: Assigning an
IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.
2
Make sure the printer’s IP name and address are entered in the /etc/hosts file.
3
At the UNIX prompt, type the following to run the SMIT utility:
smit
Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users
125
4
To add a remote queue, choose the following items from the SMIT menu:
Spooler (Print Jobs and Printers)
Manage Remote Printer Subsystem
Client Services
Remote Printer Queues
Add a Remote Queue
A form appears for you to define a remote printer.
5
Enter information into the remote printer form, as follows:
m Name of queue to add Type the local queue name users will use as the name
for the printer.
m Designation host for remote jobs Type the printer IP name assigned to the
printer as described in “Step 3: Assigning an IP Address to the Printer,”
earlier in this chapter.
m Name of queue on remote printer Type the local queue name users will use as
the name for the printer
m Name of device to add Type any name, up to 7 characters. The name is
required but has no effect on the print service.
6
To start the lpd subsystem, choose the following items from the SMIT menu:
Spooler (Print Jobs and Printers)
Manage Remote Printer Subsystem
Server Services
lpd Remote Printer Subsystem
Start Using the lpd Subsystem
Start BOTH Now and at System Restart
7
At the UNIX prompt, start the qdaemon by typing
startsrc -s qdaemon
8
Try printing by using this command:
lpr -Pprinter_queue_name
filename
Note that there’s no space between -P and printer_queue_name.
126
Chapter 4
Configuring Sun OS version 4.1, Ultrix version 4.2, or other
BSD systems
1
Log in as root.
2
Assign an IP address and IP name to the printer, as described in “Step 3: Assigning an
IP Address to the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.
3
Make sure the printer’s IP name and address are entered in the /etc/hosts file.
If you’re using Network Information Service (NIS), please see the NIS
manual for instructions on setting up an IP name and address.
4
Make sure the lpd daemon is running on the Sun OS or Ultrix system by typing the
following command at the UNIX prompt:
ps aux | grep lpd
If the lpd daemon is running, you should see output similar to
root 135 0.0 0.0
52
0 ? IW Oct 17 0:01 /usr/lib/lpr
and you should skip to step 5.
If the lpd daemon is not running, you will not see any output, and you
should start the daemon by logging in as root and typing this command at
the UNIX prompt:
/usr/lib/lpd
You can verify that the daemon is running by using the ps command
described in this step.
Note: To start the lpd daemon automatically when the system boots, make
sure that lines similar to the following exist in the /etc/rc file:
if [ -f /usr/lib/lpd ] ; then
rm -f /dev/printer /var/spool/lpd.lock
/usr/lib/lpd;echo -n ' printer'
fi
Setting Up the Printer for UNIX Users
127
5
Add the following entry to the /etc/printcap file:
local_print_queue_name|[description_of_printer]:\
:lp=:mx#0:rm=printer_IP_name:\
:rp=remote_print_queue_name:\
:sd=path_to_this_queue’s_spool_directory:\
:lf=path_to_this_queue’s_log_file:
For a description of these parameters, see “Getting UNIX Users Started
Using the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.
6
Create the spool directory that you specified in step 5:
mkdir path_to_this_queue’s_spool_directory
chmod 775 path_to_this_queue’s_spool_directory
7
Try printing by using this command:
lpr -Pprinter_queue_name
filename
Note that there’s no space between -P and printer_queue_name.
What to do next
The printer is now set up on your TCP/IP network. If you want to install any
options, see Chapter 5.
128
Chapter 4
5
Installing Options
The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS has several user-installable printer
options. You can add a 250-sheet feeder (containing a universal cassette), a
250-sheet universal cassette, and external hard disks or an internal hard disk
for font management. You can also increase the printer’s random-access
memory (RAM).
This chapter provides instructions for installing these options.
WARNING When installing any of the options described in this chapter,
be sure the printer is turned off.
129
Installing the optional 250-sheet feeder
Follow these instructions for installing the 250-sheet feeder. For instructions
on loading the feeder with paper, see “Loading the Optional 250-Sheet
Universal Cassette” in Chapter 9.
WARNING To install the 250-sheet feeder, you must place the Color
LaserWriter 12/600 PS on top of the cassette base. Because of the
printer’s weight, it’s recommended that you have two people lift the
printer. Aligning the printer on the 250-sheet feeder base is easier when
two people are lifting the printer.
The cassette base adds approximately 4 inches to the height of the Color
LaserWriter 12/600 PS. Begin by selecting a location for the printer that
provides enough room to accommodate the increased height of the printer.
If you intend to keep the printer in its current location, make sure that
adequate room will be available for opening the top cover, loading paper, and
maintaining the printer. You will also need to move the printer temporarily
from its current location to place the cassette base in its place. When moving
the printer, be sure to place it on a strong, stable surface that can support its
weight.
1
Turn off and unplug the printer.
Also, make sure the printer is disconnected from your computer or network.
2
130
Chapter 5
Unpack the 250-sheet feeder and remove any packing materials within the base and
paper cassette.
3
Remove the universal paper cassette from the feeder.
Squeeze the handle, lift
slightly, and pull the cassette out.
You don’t need to fill the cassette with paper at this time.
4
Place the feeder base where you want the printer to be located.
Orient the base so that its paper cassette and the printer’s paper cassette will
be on the front side when the printer is on the feeder base.
5
Remove the paper cassette from the printer.
Installing Options
131
6
With another person, lift the printer, position it directly over the feeder base, and gently
lower the printer until it sits evenly on the feeder.
Notice the three locator points
that protrude from the feeder.
The printer fits over these.
As you lower the printer, align the corners of the printer directly over those of
the base.
132
Chapter 5
7
Insert the locking connectors.
The locking connectors secure the printer to the feeder.
Insert the straight end of a
locking connector through
the foot of the printer,
securing it to the locator point.
8
Replace both paper cassettes (one goes inside the printer, the other inside the feeder).
9
Connect the feeder’s short power cable to the printer.
Installing Options
133
10
Connect the longer power cable (the one previously used for the printer) between the
optional feeder and a grounded electrical outlet.
11
Turn on the printer.
12
Configure your printer software to use the 250-sheet feeder.
Next you must configure the printer software on your computer to use the
new paper option. For instructions, see “Configuring Your Software for New
Printer Options,” later in this chapter.
For instructions on loading paper into the feeder, see “Loading the Optional
250-Sheet Universal Cassette” in Chapter 9. For information about printing
options with a Macintosh computer, see Chapter 6. For information about
printing options with an IBM PC or compatible computer, see Chapter 7.
134
Chapter 5
Adjusting the side margin
Once you’ve installed the optional sheet feeder, you can check its left margin
setting. If necessary, you can adjust the setting so that the left margins match
on pages printed from both paper cassettes.
1
Turn on the printer.
2
Load paper into the universal paper cassette in the feeder.
For instructions, see Chapter 9.
3
Print anything that you’ve already printed from the standard cassette (for comparison).
4
In the Print dialog box, choose Lower Cassette from the Paper Source pop-up menu.
5
Compare the left margins on the pages printed from the different paper cassettes.
If the margins are the same, no adjustment is necessary. If the margins don’t
match, change the adjustment on the optional feeder. To increase the margin,
turn the adjustment dial to a higher number. To decrease the margin, turn the
dial to a lower number.
The margin dial is located on the side
of the optional sheet feeder.
6
Repeat steps 3-5 until the margin is what you want on pages printed from the optional
feeder.
Installing Options
135
Installing the 250-sheet universal cassette
To install the 250-sheet universal cassette in the printer, follow these steps.
1
Unpack the cassette and remove any packing materials within the cassette.
2
Slide the standard paper cassette out of the printer.
3
Slide the 250-sheet universal cassette into the printer.
To load paper, see “Loading the Optional
250-Sheet Universal Cassette” in Chapter 9.
You’ve now completed installing the 250-sheet universal cassette. For
information about printing options, see Chapter 6 if you are using a
Macintosh computer or Chapter 7 if you are using an IBM PC or compatible
computer.
136
Chapter 5
Adding hard disks
You can install an internal hard disk and attach up to six external SCSI 40
MB (or larger) hard disks to the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS. The hard disk
provides space for font storage.
When you connect one or more hard disks to your printer to store fonts,
documents will print faster because your computer will rarely need to
download a font to the printer. You’ll also improve network performance
because less information is transferred over network cables.
When you do download a font, you can choose to download it either to a hard
disk or to the printer’s RAM. Downloading it to a disk stores it there
permanently (or until you remove it). If you have a Macintosh, you can
initialize the disks and download fonts to them by using the Apple Printer
Utility program (see “Sending Fonts to the Printer” in Chapter 2). If you have
an IBM PC or compatible computer, you can initialize the disks and
download fonts to them by using the Font Downloader in the Printer Setup
dialog box (see “Downloading Fonts” in Chapter 7).
Connecting a previously used hard disk
The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS recognizes disks formatted for use with the
Macintosh HFS format. However, the printer will not recognize disks using
other formats. If you attach such a disk to the printer, you will need to
reinitialize the disk before you can use it and then reload any fonts from your
computer. Reinitializing erases everything, including all fonts previously
stored on the disk.
Connecting external hard disks
You must use an HDI-30 SCSI System cable to connect the first external hard
disk to the external SCSI port. For each additional hard disk you connect to
the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS, you will need a SCSI peripheral cable,
which links two SCSI devices. You’ll also need a SCSI terminator connected
to the last device in the SCSI chain.
Installing Options
137
IMPORTANT The external hard disk you connect to the Color LaserWriter
12/600 PS printer must supply 5 volts DC to the SCSI bus to work properly.
Check the documentation that came with the hard disk for information about
SCSI voltage.
The kind of SCSI cable terminator to use with disks connected to the printer
can be black or gray. To purchase terminators, contact an Apple-authorized
dealer.
Before you connect your external hard disks, make sure that each one has a
unique SCSI ID number. Do not turn on or attempt to use the printer or any
attached hard disk until each disk has been assigned its own number. Do not
use SCSI ID #7; it is reserved for the printer’s CPU. SCSI ID #0 is used by an
internal hard drive, if one is installed.
Setting the SCSI ID number
Each SCSI device attached to the printer must have a unique ID number.
You assign a SCSI ID number by setting the SCSI ID switch on the back
panel of the disk. Follow these steps.
1
Make sure the hard disk and printer are turned off.
2
Set the SCSI ID according to the hard disk manufacturer’s specifications.
IMPORTANT Before you turn on the printer, be sure to turn on any external
hard disks attached. If you turn on the printer first, it may not recognize some
attached external hard disks. When this happens, the printer may not start up
properly, and you won’t be able to print anything. To fix this problem, make
sure all the hard disks are turned on, then restart the printer.
138
Chapter 5
Connecting a single external hard disk
1
Turn off the printer.
2
Attach the HDI-30 SCSI System cable to the SCSI port on the printer.
3
Attach the other end of the HDI-30 SCSI System cable to either SCSI port on the
hard disk.
4
Attach a cable terminator to the other SCSI port on the hard disk.
The printer recognizes disks formatted for use with the Macintosh
hierarchical file system (HFS) format. However, the printer will not recognize
disks using other formats, and the printer’s startup page will not indicate that
the hard disk is installed until after you initialize the disk. See “Initializing
Hard Disks,” later in this chapter, for more information.
Connecting multiple external hard disks
1
Turn off the printer and all hard disks connected to it.
2
Attach the HDI-30 SCSI System cable to the SCSI port on the printer.
3
Attach the other end of the cable to the SCSI port on the first hard disk.
4
Attach a peripheral cable to the other SCSI port on the first hard disk.
5
Attach the other end of the peripheral cable to either SCSI port on the next hard disk.
6
Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each additional hard disk.
7
Attach a cable terminator to the unused SCSI port on the last hard disk.
Installing Options
139
Adding an internal hard disk
To create additional space to store fonts in your Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS,
you can purchase an internal hard disk. To install the internal hard disk, you
remove the controller board from the printer, connect the hard disk to the
board, and replace the board in the printer. Be sure to wear a grounding wrist
strap when working on the controller board. If you can’t find the grounding
wrist strap that comes with the internal hard disk, you can purchase one from
a computer dealer.
IMPORTANT These instructions explain how to install an internal hard disk
yourself. You can also contact an Apple-authorized dealer who can install
your internal hard disk for a service fee.
WARNING Make sure the printer is turned off and plugged in (for
grounding).
1
If necessary, turn the printer so that the rear (opposite the side with the Apple logo and
printer’s name) is accessible.
Get help moving the printer. It takes at least two people to move it safely.
2
Remove the two screws that hold the controller board in place.
WARNING When installing the hard drive, avoid touching the surface of
the printer’s controller board with hands or tools to avoid damaging or
scratching the printed circuits.
140
Chapter 5
3
Grasp the metal frame of the controller board and slide it out of the printer.
Place the board next to the printer. (When you put on the grounding wrist
strap, you want to be able to reach the controller board easily.)
IMPORTANT Be sure to put on the grounding wrist strap before handling the
hard disk or any internal printer parts. The strap grounds you to the printer,
preventing any static discharge that might harm the controller board or
printer. Wearing the strap cannot harm you. If you can’t find the grounding
wrist strap that comes with the internal hard disk, you can purchase one from
a computer dealer.
4
Wrap the end of the grounding strap that does not have copper foil on it around your
wrist.
The strap’s light adhesive coating keeps it attached to your wrist, while
allowing for easy removal.
5
Remove the backing from the piece of copper foil at the other end of the strap.
6
Attach the copper-foil end of the strap to the metal surface on the inside of the printer by
pressing the adhesive backing against the metal.
Copper-foil end
Metal surface
Installing Options
141
7
Remove the three screws from the controller board and discard them.
8
Attach the hard drive cable to the controller board.
Attach the cable here.
9
Secure the brackets on the hard disk to the controller board with the three screws that
came in the package with the hard disk.
10
Remove and discard the grounding wrist strap.
You’ve now installed the hard disk. You need only replace the controller board
to complete the installation.
11
142
Chapter 5
Grasp the controller board by its metal frame and slide it back into the printer.
12
Replace the two screws that hold the controller board in place.
You’ve completed installing a hard disk in the printer. Next you must initialize
the hard disk before you can use it.
Initializing hard disks
After connecting an external or internal hard disk to the printer, you must
initialize the disk before you can use it. Macintosh external hard disks already
initialized in the HFS format can be used as is with the printer.
If you have a Macintosh, you can use the Apple Printer Utility to initialize a
hard disk connected to the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS. See “Initializing a
Hard Disk Connected to the Printer” in Chapter 2. If you use an IBM PC or
compatible computer, use the Font Downloader in the Windows Setup dialog
box to initialize a hard disk. See Chapter 7 for more information about
initializing disks and downloading fonts.
IMPORTANT Initialize a hard disk only once from a Macintosh or from an
IBM PC or compatible computer. After you initialize the disk, it will be able
to store font information from Macintosh computers and from IBM PC or
compatible computers. Initializing the disk again from either a Macintosh or
IBM PC or compatible will erase any font information stored there.
Your printer’s startup page will not show that a hard disk is installed until you
initialize the hard disk.
Installing Options
143
Using external hard disks from manufacturers other than Apple
IMPORTANT Some older model hard disk drives may not be compatible with
the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS.
If you are considering connecting external hard disks to your printer, keep
these points in mind:
m The printer requires SCSI 40 MB (or larger) hard disks.
m The printer must be able to tell how much storage space is available on the
disk. This is not possible with some hard disks from manufacturers other
than Apple. You cannot use these disks with the printer.
m Some non-Apple disks have internal SCSI terminators. There should be no
more than one terminator in addition to the one on the printer’s controller
board (one on the first device in the chain and one on the last device).
m The hard disk must be able to deliver at least 5 volts of termination power.
Increasing the printer RAM
The printer comes with 8 MB of RAM soldered on the controller board and a
4 MB SIMM in one of the two slots on the board. You can increase the
memory size to a total of 40 MB (maximum) by installing up to 32 additional
MB of RAM in the printer.
Adding RAM improves performance; allows more fonts to be downloaded to
the printer at one time; provides more space to store the calculations needed
for large or complex images; and increases the space available for font
caching, or maintaining recently used fonts in memory for faster access the
next time they are needed. Additional RAM also improves the image quality
of documents printed on legal-size paper.
IMPORTANT The instructions provided here explain how to install added
memory in your printer yourself. If you wish, you can also contact an Appleauthorized dealer to install more memory for a service fee.
144
Chapter 5
You can purchase additional RAM for the printer in units of 1, 4, and 16 MB
SIMMs. You can also purchase RAM expansion kits from many electronics
and computer outlets. For information about the RAM specifications required
to expand your printer’s memory, see Appendix A.
IMPORTANT The RAM used in the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS is not the
same type of RAM used in earlier LaserWriter II printers. The two are not
interchangeable.
WARNING Refrain from handling the memory until you have put on
a grounding wrist strap. Handling the memory without wearing a
grounding strap may allow static electricity to be discharged into
the memory and damage it. If you don’t have a grounding wrist strap, be
sure to purchase one from a computer dealer.
Installing RAM
The printer’s controller board has two slots, marked J10 and J11, for installing
additional memory. RAM is provided on SIMMs (Single Inline Memory
Modules) that you insert into the slots.
Your printer comes with 8 MB of RAM soldered on the main board and 4
MB inserted into slot J10.
You must have at least 12 MB of RAM in the printer, and you can increase
the total to as much as 40 MB. For example, to increase the memory size
to 16 MB, install a single 4 MB SIMM in slot J11. To increase the memory
size to 24 or 40 MB, install one or two 16 MB SIMMs in slots J10 and J11
(16 + 8 = 24; 16 + 16 + 8 = 40).
Installing Options
145
The table below lists RAM configurations you can use. Remember, the total
amount of memory (shown in the first column) includes the 8 MB of RAM
soldered on the controller board.
Amount of memory
(megabytes)
Slot J10
Slot J11
12 MB (standard)
0 MB
4 MB
13 MB
4 MB
1 MB
16 MB
4 MB
4 MB
24 MB
16 MB
0 MB
25 MB
16 MB
1 MB
28 MB
4 MB
16 MB
40 MB
16 MB
16 MB
IMPORTANT The printer requires 12 MB RAM and won’t work with less.
A total of 16 MB of RAM gives you improved print quality in legal-sized
documents.
WARNING Make sure the printer is turned off and plugged in (for
grounding).
1
If necessary, turn the printer so that the rear (opposite the side with the Apple logo and
printer’s name) is accessible.
Get help moving the printer. It takes at least two people to move it safely.
2
146
Chapter 5
Remove the two screws that hold the controller board in place.
WARNING Avoid touching the surface of the printer’s controller board
with hands or tools to avoid damaging or scratching the printed circuits.
3
Grasp the metal frame of the controller board and slide it out of the printer.
Place the board next to the printer. (When you put on the grounding wrist
strap, you want to be able to reach the controller board easily.)
IMPORTANT Put on a grounding wrist strap before handling the SIMM or any
internal printer parts. The strap grounds you to the printer, preventing any
static discharge that might harm the board or printer. Wearing the strap
cannot harm you. If you haven’t got a grounding wrist strap, you can purchase
one from a computer dealer.
4
Wrap the end of the grounding strap that does not have copper foil on it around your
wrist.
The strap’s light adhesive coating keeps it attached to your wrist, while
allowing for easy removal.
5
Remove the backing from the piece of copper foil at the other end of the strap.
6
Attach the copper-foil end of the strap to the metal surface on the inside of the printer by
pressing the adhesive backing against the metal.
Copper-foil end
Metal surface
Installing Options
147
7
Insert the SIMM into the connector at an angle and press the SIMM into the retaining
clips on each end of the connector until the clips snap and fasten the SIMM in place.
Hold the SIMM over the slot, aligning the connectors and notches with the
controller board’s connector. Notice that one edge of the SIMM has a
distinctive notch that you can use to judge the orientation and alignment of
the SIMM with the connector. This notch, on the bottom edge of the SIMM,
should be down as you install the SIMM.
WARNING To avoid damaging or scratching the printed circuits when
installing a SIMM, don’t touch the controller board with hands or tools.
J10 J11
If you are installing two
SIMMs, install one in slot
J10 first. (This makes access
to the J11 slot easier.)
Insert the SIMM at
an angle.
Rotate the SIMM until the
retaining clips snap into place.
Depending on the amount of memory you’re installing, you may need to
install one or two SIMMs, and perhaps remove a SIMM from a slot in order
to insert one that has more memory. For example, when installing two 16 MB
SIMMs, you must remove the 4 MB SIMM from the J11 slot.
To remove a SIMM, carefully spread the retaining clips at the base of the
installed SIMM, then rotate the SIMM until it can be pulled free of the slot.
148
Chapter 5
8
Repeat step 7 to install the second SIMM if necessary.
9
Remove the grounding wrist strap.
10
Slide the controller board back into the printer.
11
Replace the two screws that hold the controller board in place.
12
Turn on the printer.
The printer does self-diagnostic tests each time it is turned on. During this
testing, the printer verifies the amount of memory installed. If the test
determines that a SIMM is faulty, specific status panel lights come on.
Try reinstalling the SIMMs, following the instructions earlier in this chapter.
If this does not resolve the problem, contact an Apple-authorized dealer. (For
more information about diagnostic tests and status lights, see Appendix G.)
One light on means the SIMM in J11 is faulty.
Two lights means the SIMM in J10 is faulty.
Cyan toner light on
M
C
Bk
Y
!
Paper Out and Paper Jam lights blinking
Installing Options
149
13
Check the startup page to see that the new memory is listed there.
If the startup page has been turned off, use the Apple Printer Utility to print
the startup page. (For details, see “Turning the Startup Pages On or Off” in
Chapter 2 for Macintosh computers, or Chapter 3 for Windows computers.)
14
Next, configure the printer software to use the additional memory.
For configuration instructions, see “Configuring Your Software for New
Printer Options,” next.
Configuring your software for new printer options
After installing more memory or a 250-sheet feeder, the administrator or the
user needs to update the printer software on each computer connected to the
network. You can reconfigure the printer software using the Chooser on
Macintosh computers or the Windows Setup dialog box on IBM PC or
compatible computers.
Configuring the Macintosh printer software
1
Choose the Chooser from the File menu.
The Chooser dialog box appears.
2
Click the LaserWriter 8 icon.
3
If your network has zones, click the printer’s zone to select it. If your network doesn’t
have zones, skip to step 4.
4
Double-click the printer name.
The printer software automatically checks the printer’s options and selects the
correct settings.
5
150
Chapter 5
Close the Chooser.
Designating the 250-sheet feeder as the preferred paper source
You can tell the printer to use the optional feeder as the preferred paper
source. If you do, and you choose Auto Select in the Print dialog box, the
printer looks first in the 250-sheet feeder for paper. If it’s out of paper, the
printer looks in the standard cassette.
For more information about how the printer uses paper sources, see
“Setting Paper-Handling Options” in Chapter 2 if you have a Macintosh,
or in Chapter 3 if you have a Windows computer.
1
Choose the Chooser from the File menu.
2
In the Chooser dialog box, click the LaserWriter 8 icon.
3
If your network has zones, click the printer’s zone to select it. If your network doesn’t
have zones, skip to step 4.
4
Click the printer’s name.
5
Click Setup.
The Printer Setup dialog box appears.
6
Click Configure.
Installing Options
151
7
In the dialog box that appears, choose Installed or Installed and Preferred from the
Cassette pop-up menu.
8
Click OK.
9
In the Printer Setup dialog box that appears, click OK.
Now the printer recognizes that the optional feeder has been installed. If you
chose Installed and Preferred, the printer knows that the optional feeder is
the preferred paper source for Auto Select (a choice in the Print dialog box).
Configuring the printer from an IBM PC or compatible
You must have Windows running on your computer to use this procedure.
1
From the Program Manager, double-click the Control Panels, then double-click the
Printers Control Panel icon to display the Printer Setup dialog box.
2
Select the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS from the list of Printers.
3
Choose the Setup command from the Options menu to display the Setup dialog box for
your printer.
The Setup dialog box contains buttons that display other dialog boxes
containing additional printer settings.
4
In the Setup dialog box, click the Features button.
The Features dialog box appears.
152
Chapter 5
5
In the Features dialog box, use the controls to set up the optional features that you have
installed on your printer.
6
Click OK to close the Features dialog box.
7
Click Close to close the Setup dialog box.
Guide for Users
Chapter 6
Macintosh Users
Chapter 7
Windows and DOS Users
Chapter 8
UNIX Users
Chapter 9
Loading Paper
Chapter 10 Maintenance
Chapter 11 Clearing Paper Jams
Chapter 12 Fixing Image Problems
Chapter 13 Troubleshooting
Part II contains information you need to use a
printer that has already been set up. You can find
setup instructions in Part I.
II
part
6
Macintosh Users
The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS comes with software and fonts for use with
Macintosh computers. This chapter describes the system requirements and
the procedures for installing the printer software and fonts on a Macintosh.
You’ll also find explanations for using the standard printing and page setup
options of the LaserWriter 8 printer driver software supplied with your
printer.
155
System requirements
To use the printer software, you need a Macintosh with a 68020 or higher
central processing unit (any Macintosh except a Macintosh Plus, SE, Classic,
Portable, or PowerBook 100). Your Macintosh must have system software
version 7.1 or later and at least 4 megabytes (MB) of memory. If your system
software is an earlier version, you need to obtain a system software upgrade
from your computer or software dealer.
Installing all the printer software and fonts for the Macintosh requires
approximately 7.5 MB of free space on your hard disk.
Installing the printer software
To install the printer software on a Macintosh computer, follow these steps:
IMPORTANT Do not “drag install” the printer software. If you do, the files
won’t be properly decompressed and won’t work.
1
Turn off any automatic virus-detection programs you have on your Macintosh computer.
If you don’t, problems may occur during the installation. After installation is
complete, you can turn the virus-detection programs back on. (For
instructions on turning off each virus-detection program, see the manual that
came with the program, or telephone the manufacturer of the program.)
2
Press and hold down the Shift key, then choose Restart from the Special menu.
When a message on the screen tells you that the extensions are off, you can
release the Shift key. Your extensions have been turned off. When you restart
the Macintosh after a successful installation, the extensions will turn on
again.
3
Make sure the printer software disks are locked.
4
Insert Printer Disk 1 for Macintosh into a disk drive.
If necessary, open the disk icon.
156
Chapter 6
5
To start the Installer program, double-click its icon.
6
In the Welcome dialog box that appears, click Continue.
After a moment, the Install dialog box appears. At the top of the dialog box is
a pop-up menu set to allow you to perform an Easy install.
IMPORTANT The Installer checks to make sure you have what you need to use
the printer software. If you’re missing anything, a message tells you what you
need. You won’t be able to install the printer software until you correct the
problem. If a dialog box says you don’t have the correct system software, you
can purchase a new version from an Apple-authorized dealer.
7
In the Installer dialog box, click the Install button.
Make sure the disk
named here is the
one on which you
want to install the
printer software.
When you’re ready to
begin, click Install.
The Installer takes a few moments to calculate what needs to be done and
then begins to copy files.
Macintosh Users
157
8
Follow the instructions on the screen until the installation is complete.
The Installer ejects disks and asks you to insert others. Keep following the
instructions on the screen until the installation is complete.
9
When you see a message reporting that installation was successful, click Restart.
The Installer restarts your Macintosh.
The software is now installed on the hard disk. If you turned off any
automatic virus-detection programs on your Macintosh, turn them
on again.
Note: If installation is not successful, see Chapter 13 for suggestions.
More information about the Installer program
In the procedure just described, the Installer places all the software you need
on your hard disk. In rare circumstances, you many want to install only a
subset of the software. In that case, choose Custom Install from the pop-up
menu in the Installer. A list of choices appears. To install something from the
list, click to select it, then click the Install button.
158
Chapter 6
Selecting and setting up the printer
Before using your printer for the first time, you must select it in the Chooser.
Once you select the printer in the Chooser, you won’t need to repeat this step
unless you change printers or change the way your printer is connected.
1
Choose the Chooser from the Apple (K) menu.
2
In the Chooser dialog box, click items to select them.
First, click this icon.
(If necessary, use the
scroll bar and arrows
to find the icon.)
Third, click the name of the
printer you want to use.
If an icon appears beside the
printer name, the printer
software has already been
set up.
Second, if the
network has zones,
click one to select it.
Finally, click Setup.
(Or double-click the printer
name—a shortcut.)
The Chooser identifies the type of printer and automatically sets up the
printer software. A small printer icon appears beside the printer name.
3
Close the Chooser.
After you close the Chooser, a desktop printer icon for the Color LaserWriter
12/600 PS appears on the desktop. (If you don’t close the Chooser, the desktop
printer won’t be created.) If you want, you can repeat steps 1 through 3,
selecting and setting up other printers on your desktop for easy access.
The last desktop printer you create
becomes the default printer.
(Its icon has a bold outline.)
A desktop printer icon cannot be moved off the desktop (unless you throw it
away); however, you can move it anywhere on the desktop that you like.
Macintosh Users
159
Creating, throwing away, and manipulating desktop printer icons
To create a desktop printer, select the printer using the Chooser. After you
close the Chooser, the icon will appear on your desktop. See “Selecting and
Setting Up the Printer,” earlier in this chapter.
You may also do the following with desktop printer icons:
m Throw away the icon Drag the icon to the Trash. You can’t throw away a
desktop printer icon while the printer is printing a document. (You can
create another desktop printer icon for that printer whenever you like.)
Note: You must always have at least one printer icon on your desktop. If
you throw away the last icon, it will immediately be created again.
m Rename the icon Rename the icon as you would any other Finder icon. Click
the name to highlight it, then type the new name. This changes the name of
the icon, not the name of the printer.
m Move the icon You may drag the icon anywhere you like on the desktop.
However, you may not move it off the desktop.
m Create an alias for the icon You may create an alias for the icon as you would
any Finder icon, by selecting the icon and choosing the Make Alias
command from the File menu. The alias may be moved anywhere on or off
the desktop.
Determining the status of a printer by looking at its icon
You can tell the status of a printer by looking at its desktop icon:
160
Chapter 6
Plain icon indicates a printer
that is not currently chosen
for printing.
Stopped icon indicates you have
stopped the print queue.
Default icon indicates the printer
you have currently chosen to
print on.
Error icon indicates there is an
error on this printer. Double-click
the icon to see a message.
Printing icon indicates a
document is printing on this
printer.
Disabled icon indicates this
desktop printer is not available.
See Chapter 13.
Switching between printers
If you have more than one printer available, you must select which printer you
want to use. The printer you select is called the default printer.
A bold outline around the desktop printer icon indicates that
this is the default printer, where all your documents will print,
until you indicate otherwise.
A plain outline around the desktop printer icon indicates that
this is not the default printer.
To change the default printer, use one of these three methods, as described in
the next sections.
m Drag the document you want to print to a desktop printer icon, and that
printer automatically becomes the default printer.
m Select the desktop printer icon and choose Set Default Printer from the
Printing menu.
m Select a new printer using the Chooser.
Note: Switching between printers may change how much information you
can fit on a page. It’s best to choose a printer before you spend much time
paginating the document.
Drag the document you want to print to a desktop printer icon
You can switch to a new default printer by dragging the icon of any document
you want to print to the icon of the printer you want to use.
Select the printer using its desktop printer icon
If you already have a desktop printer icon for the printer you want to use,
follow these steps to select a new default printer without immediately printing
anything on it:
1
Click the icon of the desktop printer you want to use.
A Printing menu appears on the menu bar at the top of the screen.
2
Choose the Set Default Printer command from the Printing menu.
Until you choose another printer, the Print command will send your
documents to this printer.
Macintosh Users
161
Select a new printer using the Chooser
If you don’t have a desktop printer icon for the printer you want to use, you
must select the printer using the Chooser. The Chooser will then create a
desktop printer icon for the printer that you select and make it the default
printer.
1
Choose the Chooser from the Apple menu.
2
Select the printer that you want.
3
Close the Chooser by choosing Close from the File menu.
When you close the Chooser, it creates a desktop printer icon for the printer
you selected.
Printing
On a Macintosh, printing functions are controlled through the Page Setup and
Print dialog boxes, which are accessed through the File menu.
Most Macintosh application programs use a version of the standard Page
Setup and Print dialog boxes, although the exact options presented vary
among programs. (See the manuals that came with your program for details
about specific options.)
The printer administrator can use the Apple Printer Utility to change default
settings the printer uses for all documents. For more information about the
Apple Printer Utility, see Chapter 2.
Selecting page setup options
The Macintosh Page Setup dialog box allows you to specify certain aspects of
your document, such as its page size, format, and orientation, as well as the
settings for several print effects. You can change these settings for every
document you create. It’s recommended that you set your page setup options
when you first create a document. Then, as you view and format the
document it will closely resemble its final printed form.
1
Choose Page Setup from the File menu.
The Page Setup dialog box appears.
162
Chapter 6
2
In the dialog box that appears, select the page setup options you want.
Most Macintosh programs use a dialog box similar to the one shown below,
although the exact features may vary.
Use this pop-up menu to indentify
the paper size you are using.
Use the Layout pop-up menu to choose
1, 2, or 4 pages per sheet. (The printer
reduces or enlarges pages to fit the layout.)
When the selections
are set the way you
want, click OK.
For the dimensions
of the paper currently
selected, click here.
(To return to the
picture, click again.)
To see a dialog box
that lets you select
enhancements to
the printed image,
click Options.
This picture illustrates your
choice of paper, layout, and
orientation, and it reflects
changes as you make them.
3
When you’ve made your choices, click OK.
To make the printer’s current page setup settings the default software settings,
hold down Option and click OK. (Some programs may not support this
method of setting defaults.)
Macintosh Users
163
Printing documents
Most programs on the Macintosh use a Print dialog box similar to the one
shown below, although the exact features may vary. You can use the dialog
box to specify print options such as the number of copies you want printed.
Some programs add more choices to the Print dialog box. For information
about such options, refer to the documentation that came with the program.
1
Choose Print from the File menu (or drag the document to the desktop printer icon and
drop it on the printer).
2
In the dialog box that appears, select the options you want.
To define a single
paper source, click All.
Then choose a paper
source from the
pop-up menu.
To print a transparency or sheet of
paper that you feed by hand, select
Manual Feed as the paper source.
To print the document
on paper, click Printer.
To save it as a
PostScript or EPS file,
click File.
To define multiple
paper sources,
click “First from.”
Then choose
one paper source
from each of the
pop-up menus.
IMPORTANT The paper source menus vary according to the paper sources of
your printer and paper sizes you choose in the Page Setup dialog box. For
paper-loading instructions, see Chapter 9.
3
164
Chapter 6
When the selections are what you want, click Print (or Save, if the destination is not
a printer).
Printing a cover page automatically
You can choose to print a cover page that provides information about the
printed document, such as the document’s name and the date and time of
printing.
1
Choose Print from the File menu.
The Print dialog box appears.
2
In the Print dialog box, make the selections you want.
3
Click Options.
4
In the Print Options dialog box, make the selections you want.
For a cover page that appears at the front or at the end
of the document, click Before or After Document.
To print the
document without
a cover page,
click None.
5
Click OK.
6
In the Print dialog box, click Print.
The cover page will print each time you print your document.
Macintosh Users
165
Printing color and grayscale documents
When you print a document containing colors or shades of gray, you can
choose to maximize either image quality or speed.
1
Choose Print from the File menu (or drag the document to the desktop printer icon and
drop it on the printer).
2
In the Print dialog box, make the selections you want.
3
Click Options.
4
In the Print Options dialog box, choose what you want from the Print pop-up menu.
m For the fastest printing, choose Black and White. (The image quality won’t
be as good, especially if the original image is in color.)
m If you’re using a customized color-matching method or printer profile,
choose ColorSync Color Matching. Printing with ColorSync Color
Matching, the computer does the work, matching the RGB colors on your
monitor and the printer’s profile and sending the correct CMYK
information to the printer.
Be sure to set the ColorSync system profile to match your monitor. (See
Appendix D.)
m If your print job contains JPEG compressed images (such as QuickTime or
QuickTake 100 images) choose PostScript Color Matching. Printing with
PostScript Color Matching, more color matching is done on the printer.
166
Chapter 6
5
Click OK.
6
In the Print dialog box, click Print.
Reporting printing errors
You can specify how printing errors are reported when they occur. You can
have the printer provide no special reporting, provide a summary of the print
error on your Macintosh screen (when using foreground printing), or print a
page reporting the error.
1
Choose Print from the File menu (or drag the document to the desktop printer icon and
drop it on the printer).
The Print dialog box appears.
2
In the Print dialog box, make the selections you want.
3
Click Options.
4
In the Print Options dialog box, choose what you want.
Choose the reporting
method you want
from this pop-up
menu.
5
Click OK.
6
Click Print in the Print dialog box.
Macintosh Users
167
Turning tray switching on or off
Tray switching lets you switch automatically between the paper cassette and
the multipurpose tray (or other optional paper source) without reloading
paper when one paper source runs out of paper.
IMPORTANT If you have the same size paper in your paper cassettes and
multipurpose tray and have tray switching turned on, the printer may draw
paper from any paper source that has the correct size paper (even if you
select a specific paper source from the Print dialog box). If you want to print
from a specific paper source only, turn automatic tray switching off.
1
Choose Print from the File menu (or drag the document to the desktop printer icon and
drop it on the printer).
2
In the Print dialog box, make the selections you want.
3
Click Options.
4
In the Print Options dialog box, choose On, Off, or Printer’s default from the Tray Switch
pop-up menu.
Choose On, Off, or Printer’s Default.
(You select the default—automatic tray switching
on or off—in the Apple Printer Utility.
168
Chapter 6
To save your Tray
Switch setting as
the printer’s default
setting, click Save.
Printing transparencies
When you want to print transparencies, choose the Print command and click
the Options button in the Print dialog box. Then choose Transparency from
the Paper Type menu in the Print Options dialog box.
A page you print as a transparency looks different from the same page printed
on paper. You can see bigger dots of color on the transparency film. This kind
of printed image looks best when projected on a screen.
Changing the Print Quality mode
The Print Quality pop-up menu offers these choices:
m Normal for speed and good quality for most purposes
m Best for improved registration (needed only for special printing jobs)
m Printer’s Default for when you use the Apple Printer Utility (in the Job
Defaults category, Imaging Options panel) to make the choice
1
Choose Print from the File menu (or drag the document to the desktop printer icon and
drop it on the printer).
2
In the Print dialog box, make the selections you want.
3
Click Options.
4
In the Print Options dialog box, choose Normal, Best, or Printer’s Default from the Tray
Switch pop-up menu.
Choose Fastest, Best, or Printer’s Default.
(You select the default—automatic tray switching
on or off—in the Apple Printer Utility.
To save your Print
Quality Mode setting
as the printer’s default
setting, click Save.
Macintosh Users
169
Printing while using the computer for other work
With background printing turned on, you can use your Macintosh for other
work while you’re printing.
To turn background printing on, follow these steps:
1
Select Chooser from the Apple menu.
2
In the Chooser dialog box, click the LaserWriter 8 icon.
3
Click to turn background printing on or off.
Click On or Off.
4
Close the Chooser.
Once background printing is turned on, it is in effect whenever you print,
until you turn it off. When you click Print in the Print dialog box, a message
appears for a moment to tell you the document is being prepared. Once the
message disappears, you can continue other work. Your computer may pause
occasionally while it processes the document for printing. See “Monitoring
and Controlling Background Printing,” next, for more information.
170
Chapter 6
Monitoring and controlling background printing
If you are using background printing, you can use the desktop printer features
to monitor and control the documents that are waiting to print. To learn how
to turn background printing on and off, see the previous section, “Printing
While Using the Computer for Other Work.”
To monitor or control a print request, follow these steps:
1
Double-click the desktop printer icon you’re interested in.
A window opens listing the documents that are printing or waiting to print:
Column titles (click to sort)
Documents currently printing
Documents waiting to print
Watching the status messages can be helpful when troubleshooting printing
problems. When more than one job is waiting to be printed, a list of print
jobs appears in the waiting list. When you sort the list by Print Time, it shows
the order in which they will be printed.
2
Choose what you’d like to do.
m To delete a print request, select its title or icon (by clicking it), then click the
Remove button. (You can select more than one item at a time by holding
down the Shift key while clicking.) You can also drag the icon for the print
request to the Trash. Note that these methods delete only the print job (also
known as the spool file), not the document itself.
m To put a print request on hold, click its title or icon to select it, then click the
Hold button. The print request stays on hold until you select its title again
and click the Resume button. You can also put the document that’s
currently printing on hold by dragging it to the list of documents waiting
to print.
Macintosh Users
171
m To indicate that a print request is urgent, select its title or icon (by clicking it),
then choose Set Print Time from the Printing menu. In the dialog box that
opens, click Urgent. This moves the print request to the top of your list.
m To indicate that a print request should not print until a future time, select its title or
icon (by clicking it), then choose Set Print Time from the Printing menu.
In the dialog box that opens, click At Time, then set the time you want.
m To change the order of the items waiting to print, move their place in the list by
dragging their titles up or down in the list.
m To sort the list of documents waiting to print, click the title of the column you
want to sort by. For example, to sort by the name of the document, click
Document Name. (You can also sort by choosing the commands in the
View menu.) The column title you sorted by is underlined. Sorting the
items does not change the order in which they will print. To see that order,
sort by Print Time.
m To temporarily stop all documents from printing on this printer, choose Stop Print
Queue from the Printing menu. To resume using the printer, choose Start
Print Queue from the Printing menu. If you’re using a PowerBook, this can
be a good way to save print requests while you’re on the road until you get
back to your printer.
Shortcut: If you click the printer’s desktop icon to select it, you can choose
the commands that start and stop the print queue from the Printing menu
without opening the window for the printer.
m To move a print request from one printer to another printer of the same type, drag
the icon for the print request (spool file) to the icon of the printer where
you want to move it. If you’re not sure whether the two printers are of the
same type, try moving the print request anyway—the printer software won’t
let you move a print request to an incompatible printer.
3
To continue working while documents print, click on a desktop window or your desktop.
Using the Apple Printer Utility
The Apple Printer Utility program supplied with the printer software allows
the printer administrator to control various aspects of how the printer works.
For information about using the Apple Printer Utility, see Chapter 2.
172
Chapter 6
7
Windows and DOS Users
The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS comes with software for IBM PC or
compatible computers using Windows 3.1. This chapter describes how to
install and use the PostScript Printer Driver and other printer software.
Note for Windows NT users: See “Installing Software for Windows NT” (later
in this chapter) for installation instructions. Refer to your Windows NT
manual for instructions about printing.
System requirements
To use the printer, your computer system must meet these requirements:
m IBM PC or compatible, with an 80386 or higher CPU
m hard disk drive
m at least 4 megabytes (MB) of random-access memory (RAM)
m Microsoft Windows 3.1 or 3.1x or Windows for Workgroups 3.11 or 3.1x
m MS-DOS version 3.3 or higher (5.0 or higher recommended)
m 3.5-inch floppy disk drive that reads 1.44 MB disks
m NetWare requires an 80386 CPU with NetWare version 3.0 or higher
m each user of the Apple Printer Utility or Apple Print Monitor must have
NetWare Client Software for Windows 3.12 or 4.x installed
Installing all the printer software for the IBM PC or compatible computer
requires approximately 3.5 MB of free space on your hard disk.
173
Installing the Windows printer software
To install the Windows printer software (if not already installed by your
system administrator), follow these steps. These instructions assume that you
have a mouse or similar pointing device.
1
Find the Windows disks that came with the printer and make sure they’re locked.
You lock a disk by sliding up its write-protection tab. The disk is locked when
you can see through the hole.
2
Start Windows.
Before installing the software, make sure the Windows Control Panel and
Printers control panel are closed.
3
Insert Printer Disk 1 for Windows into a floppy disk drive.
4
Read the README.TXT file on Printer Disk 1 for Windows to check for late-breaking
news.
You can do this with Windows Notepad or another word processor.
5
From the Windows Program Manager, choose Run from the File menu.
6
Type a:\setup or b:\setup (depending on which drive holds your installation
disk) in the command line field and click OK.
After a few moments, a welcome message is displayed that allows you to
select Express Installation or Custom Installation, or De-Install.
Express Installation installs all the software you need to print with your Color
LaserWriter 12/600 PS. It creates the Apple LaserWriter Software program
group and installs within it the ReadMe file, Apple Print Monitor for
Windows, and the Apple Printer Utility for Windows, used to name the
printer and perform various printer administrative functions.
Custom Installation lets you specify what portions of the software you would
like to install. De-Install lets you remove previously installed LaserWriter
software.
174
Chapter 7
7
Click Express Installation.
A window appears that keeps you informed as file decompression proceeds.
Insert other printer disks (and click OK) as the program asks for them.
Instructions appear describing the next three steps in the installation
procedure. Take a moment to read them.
8
Click Continue.
The Adobe Printers control panel appears.
9
Select the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS and click OK.
The PostScript Printer Driver files, Apple Print Monitor for Windows, and
the Apple Printer Utility for Windows are installed on the hard disk. A
message appears telling you that the driver software was successfully
installed.
10
Click OK to dismiss the message.
11
Select another printer, if any, and click OK to install. Repeat for each printer you want
to install.
12
When you’re done, click Close.
A message appears telling you to use the Printers control panel to connect
and set up the printers you’ve installed. By default, each printer uses LPT1.
The Printers control panel Setup dialog box lets you specify a different port,
for example, LPT2 or a NetWare queue.
13
Click OK to clear the message.
Another message tells you that installation is complete.
14
Click Restart Windows to have the changes take effect.
The Apple LaserWriter Software program group now appears on your
Windows Program Manager screen. Contained within the program group are
the ReadMe file, Apple Print Monitor for Windows, and the Apple Printer
Utility for Windows.
Windows and DOS Users
175
15
Choose how to proceed:
For most users connected via the parallel cable, the default printer driver
settings should suffice.
You can monitor your printer software with Apple Print Monitor for
Windows; see the section “Initial Apple Print Monitor for Windows Setup,”
in Chapter 3.
For instructions on using the Apple Printer Utility for Windows, see “Setting
Additional Parameters with the Apple Printer Utility for Windows,” in
Chapter 3.
To configure your printer software with NetWare, see “Initial Novell NetWare
Setup,” in Chapter 3.
For instructions on using Adobe Type Manager, for example to install or
remove Type 1 fonts, see “Installed Type 1 Fonts and Adobe Type Manager,”
in Chapter 3.
16
Exit from the installer.
If you’re not going to use NetWare or your computer is connected directly to
the printer by a parallel cable, click Close. If your computer is connected to
the printer over a NetWare network, follow these steps:
m From Windows, click Control Panel.
m Click Printers.
m Click Connect. The Connect dialog box opens.
m Click Network. The NetWare Printer Connections dialog box opens.
m Select the queue and the port the printer is assigned to.
m Click Capture and click Close to close the dialog box.
m Highlight the queue and port combination you specified earlier and
click OK.
m In the Printers control panel, set the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS printer
as the default printer and click Close.
Note: If you don’t already have your NetWare queues set up, go to “Initial
Novell NetWare Setup,” in Chapter 3, when you finish installing the software.
176
Chapter 7
What to do next
The PostScript Printer Driver and other software are now installed. To learn
to use the PostScript Printer Driver, turn to “Printing From Windows
Applications,” later in this chapter.
Installing software for Windows NT
The steps to install the PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file for the Color
LaserWriter 12/600 PS (or other Apple printer) on a Windows NT system are
similar to those in the previous section, except that you select Custom Install
(step 7) and click “Windows NT Printer Software.” Make sure the other
checkboxes are deselected, then follow these steps:
1
Click Install. Instructions for installing the WIndows NT software appear.
2
Click Continue. The Print Manager appears.
3
Select Create Printer from the Print Manager’s Printer menu. The Create Printer dialog
box appears.
4
Select Other (at the bottom of the list) in the Driver Combo box.
5
Insert Printer Disk 3 for Windows in the floppy disk drive.
6
Make sure the correct floppy disk drive is indicated in the Install Driver dialog box and
click OK. A list of printer drivers appears.
7
Select the printer driver that corresponds to your printer and click OK.
8
Follow the instructions on the screen, and click Continue and OK to complete the
installation.
Windows and DOS Users
177
Printing from Windows applications
After you have connected the printer to your computer and installed and set
up the printer software, you’re ready to start printing. This section explains the
basic steps required to print a document, though the details can vary from one
program to another. To find out more about printing from your programs,
read the documentation that came with them. If you have Windows NT, print
using the TCP/IP protocol or using AppleTalk protocol. See your Windows NT
manual for information on configuring.
To print a document from a Windows program, the program must be open
and the document window must be active.
1
Choose Print from the File menu.
In most cases a Print dialog box appears in which you can select options,
including the number of copies and the pages to print. Depending on your
program, the Print dialog box may offer other options.
2
Select the options you want and click Print.
A message appears while the document is queued to the Print Manager. After
the message disappears, you can go on with your work while your document
is being printed.
Setting printer driver options
You can change the PostScript Printer Driver default options. For example,
you can change the preset paper orientation to Portrait or Landscape.
You set printer options in the printer driver Setup dialog box, which you can
open in three ways, as explained in the sections that follow:
m from the Control Panel
m from your application
m from the Print Manager
Note: When changing options to print a specific document, it’s preferable to
change the options from within the application. Settings you change from
within an application will affect that document only and not all documents
printed afterward. Settings you change in an application’s Print dialog box
override print options you set in the Setup dialog box.
178
Chapter 7
Opening the printer Setup dialog box from the Control Panel
1
From the Program Manager, double-click the Control Panel icon to display the Control
Panel.
2
Double-click the Printers icon to display the Printers dialog box.
3
Select the printer you want to set up from the List of Installed Printers.
4
Choose Setup to display the Setup dialog box for the printer.
You can also use the Printers dialog box to select a default printer, to switch
the Print Manager on and off, and to connect your printer to a different port.
Opening the printer setup dialog box from your application
Most applications have a Print Setup command in their File menus.
1
Choose the Print Setup command from the File menu.
This command usually displays the Print Setup dialog box.
2
If you are using more than one printer, select the printer you want to set up.
3
Click the Options (or Setup) button to display the Setup dialog box.
Note: The names of the commands and buttons used to display the printer
Setup dialog box vary from program to program. See your program’s
documentation for the precise command and button names it uses.
Opening the printer Setup dialog box from the Print Manager
1
From the Program Manager, double-click the Print Manager icon to display the Print
Manager.
2
Select the printer you want to set up from the list of Printers.
3
Choose the Setup or Printer Setup command from the Options menu to display the Setup
dialog box for your printer.
Windows and DOS Users
179
Selecting printer options in the Setup dialog box
You can change the most commonly used printer settings from the Setup
dialog box. (The tabs in the dialog box also give you access to additional
printer settings. For information about these settings, see “Additional
Printer Options,” next.) The previous sections explain how to open the
Setup dialog box.
The Paper tab dialog box is displayed first:
m Output Format Selects either PostScript or Encapsulated PostScript. Use
PostScript for normal printing. Use Encapsulated PostScript to create a file
that can be placed in a document of a program that accepts Encapsulated
PostScript images.
m Paper Source Selects which paper cassette or multipurpose tray to use as the
paper source.
m Paper Size Specifies the paper size. Select the size that matches the paper in
the current paper source.
m Orientation Selects the orientation of the printed page. You can select
Portrait (tall), Landscape (wide), or Rotated Landscape (which prints text
and images in landscape orientation, but reverses the top and bottom of the
page, most useful when you’re printing with three-hole punched paper).
180
Chapter 7
m Scaling Shrinks or enlarges the print image by a percentage you specify.
You can scale the image from 10 percent to 400 percent.
m Copies Specifies the number of copies of each document page to print.
m Watermarks Specifies which watermark to use.
m Layout Specifies the number of pages to print on each sheet of paper.
m Preview Screen Shows changes you make in the driver settings.
Note: To print on transparencies, you must select Transparency using the
Paper Type option in the Features tab dialog box.
Additional printer options
In addition to the Paper tab, other tabs display settings for:
m PostScript
m Fonts
m Features
m Job control
m Watermark
Windows and DOS Users
181
PostScript
Click the PostScript tab to display the PostScript tab dialog box, which
controls color printing, the communication protocol, and PostScript Level 2
features.
The PostScript tab dialog box lets you set the following options:
m Use PostScript Level 2 features Tells the driver to use PostScript Level 2
features when printing documents. Use the Level 2 features to speed
printing.
m Send Data in Binary Tells the driver to send data to the printer in a binary
format. Sending data in binary format may improve the printer’s
performance when printing images or documents containing many
downloadable fonts. The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS printer can always
receive data in either ASCII or binary format.
m Send Full Color Data Tells the driver to print colors on a color printer. Usually
it is best to select this option even when printing to a non-color printer.
Colors print in finer shades of gray.
m Match Colors Across Printers Tells the driver to save color-matching
information with the data for use later when the document is saved to a file
for printing on a different PostScript Level 2 printer.
182
Chapter 7
m Job Timeout Sets the maximum number of seconds that the printer will
spend trying to print a document before canceling the print job. A value of
zero means that the job is never canceled.
m Wait Timeout Sets the maximum number of seconds that the printer will
wait for Windows to send data before canceling the print job. A value of
zero means that the job is never canceled.
m Margins Changes the way the printer driver reports the printable area to the
applications you use. The Default option tells the driver to report the
printable area accurately to the applications. The None option tells the
driver to report the dimensions of the paper as the printable area.
m Protocol Options Tells the print driver whether to begin and end print jobs
with Ctrl-D. Default means it will begin and end jobs with a Ctrl-D, and
None means it won’t. If the printer is connected to your computer or
network by its parallel port, click Default; if it’s connected by its Ethernet
port, click None.
m PostScript Performance Tells the driver to build PostScript document
descriptions that print as fast as possible when Optimize for Speed is
selected. Such document descriptions might not print successfully on
printers with limited memory. Select “Optimize for Portability” to tell the
driver to build PostScript document descriptions that print successfully on
many different printers.
Windows and DOS Users
183
Fonts
Click the Fonts tab to display the Fonts tab dialog box. Parameters in this
dialog box control the way the driver prints TrueType fonts used in your
documents. The driver can download available TrueType fonts as TrueType
fonts (Type 42); substitute available PostScript fonts for TrueType fonts; or
automatically create PostScript versions of TrueType fonts and download
them to the printer when you print.
The TrueType Fonts tab dialog box lets you set the following options:
m Send TrueType Fonts to This Printer as Tells the driver what kind of PostScript
fonts to create for TrueType fonts. Select one of these options:
m Type 1 to synthesize outline PostScript fonts.
m Type 3 to synthesize bitmapped PostScript fonts.
m Type 42 to package TrueType fonts for the PostScript printer.
m Don’t Send to use TrueType fonts that are resident in the printer or are
supplied by print-manager software. (No TrueType fonts are resident on
the printer as it is shipped from the factory.)
184
Chapter 7
m Substitute PostScript Fonts for TrueType Fonts on This Printer When checked,
tells the driver to substitute PostScript fonts available to the printer for
TrueType fonts. The driver uses the TrueType Substitutions table to
determine which PostScript font to use for each TrueType font installed on
your system. Substituting PostScript fonts for TrueType fonts speeds
printing (especially when the PostScript fonts are resident in the printer).
m TrueType Substitutions for All Printers Lists all the TrueType fonts installed on
your system, and for each TrueType font, shows which PostScript font is
substituted for a TrueType font. This table is used only when you select the
“Substitute PostScript Fonts for TrueType Fonts on This Printer” option.
m For This TrueType Font Shows a list of all the TrueType fonts installed on
your system.
m Substitute This Font Lets you select how font substitution is done. Shows a
list of the PostScript fonts that are substituted for the TrueType fonts. Each
list box lists all the PostScript fonts available to the printer. PostScript
fonts available to the printer include all the fonts resident in the printer’s
ROM, as well as all the Type 1 fonts that you have downloaded to the
printer’s RAM or hard disks. Each list box also contains a Send As Type 1
option, which converts the TrueType font to a Type 1 font. The Use
Defaults button restores the original PostScript font substitutions.
IMPORTANT For information about using Font Downloader, see “Downloading
Fonts,” later in this chapter.
Windows and DOS Users
185
Features
Click the Features tab to display the Features tab dialog box, which lets you
configure the printer software to use optional printing features that you install
on the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS. Use this dialog box to set up any
optional features you may purchase, such as additional memory or the 250sheet feeder.
The Features tab dialog box lets you configure the printer to use the following
options:
m Memory Configuration The amount of RAM installed in the printer.
m Cassette Indicates whether you have installed the optional 250-sheet
feeder.
m Tray Switch Turns tray switching on or off.
m Paper Type Plain or Transparency.
m Print Quality Mode Normal (fastest print speed) or Best (slower print speed).
186
Chapter 7
Job Control
Click the Job Control tab to display the Job Control tab dialog box, which
controls such options as when the PostScript header and the PostScript error
handler are sent to your printer.
The following list describes the printer settings in the Job Control tab
dialog box.
m Printer Mode By default, the printer is set up to receive data in either binary
or ASCII format. There is no need to switch between these manually.
m PostScript Header The PostScript header contains instructions that a
PostScript printer needs to print documents created by the driver. If your
printer is connected directly to your computer only, you can save time by
choosing the Download button to send the PostScript header only once—
when you switch on your printer. Download Each Job tells the driver to
send the PostScript header with every document. Already Downloaded
tells the driver not to send the PostScript header with documents.
Download tells the driver to send the header when you choose the
Download button.
m Error Handler Tells the driver to send a special PostScript error handler with
every document you print. The error handler prints a page with a
PostScript error message when a document fails to print correctly. You can
use this option as an aid in troubleshooting print job problems.
m Font Control This advanced feature tells the driver not to download fonts
when printing documents. Use this option if you know that the fonts you
use in your documents are always available to the printer.
Windows and DOS Users
187
Watermark
Click the Watermark tab to display the Watermark tab dialog box, which
contains options for defining, editing, and deleting watermarks.
Display area
The following list describes the settings in the Watermark tab dialog box.
m Select a Watermark Lists available watermark definitions, which can be
selected and edited or deleted.
m Edit Displays the Edit Watermark dialog box, summarized below.
m Add Displays the Add Watermark dialog box, which has the same features
as the Edit Watermark dialog box, summarized below.
m Delete Deletes the selected watermark definition.
m Display area A bitmap area that displays a portrait image of what the page
will look like when printed.
188
Chapter 7
Edit Watermark
Choose the Edit button in the Watermark tab dialog box to display the Edit
Watermark dialog box.
The following settings are available in the Edit Watermark dialog box:
m Text Displays the text of the selected watermark for editing.
m Font Lists all TrueType and ATM fonts and the 13 base PostScript fonts
that either reside in the printer or can be downloaded to the printer.
m Size Lets you specify a font size between 7 and 600 points.
m Style Lets you specify a font style: Regular, Bold, Italic, and Bold Italic, as
available.
m Print in Foreground Tells the printer to print the watermark in the foreground
rather than in the background (the default). Choose this setting if you
cannot see the watermark on the printed page.
m Print Outline Only Tells the printer to print only the outline of the watermark.
Choose this setting if the watermark is covering graphic images in the
document.
m Angle Lets you specify the angle at which the watermark will display on
the page.
Windows and DOS Users
189
m Color Lets you specify red, green, and blue values for the color in which
the watermark is printed. As an alternative, Choose Color brings up a
Color dialog box that lets you view and select a color for the watermark.
m Position/Automatically Center Watermark/Position Relative to Center Tells the
driver how to position the watermark. Automatically Center Watermark
centers the watermark on the page. Position Relative to Center lets you
specify x and y coordinates for the watermark relative to the center.
Downloading fonts
The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS uses downloadable PostScript fonts, which
are a type of soft font. The PostScript Printer Driver automatically downloads
any Type 1 fonts from your computer’s hard disk to the printer’s memory as
needed for each document that you print. You can also use the driver to
manually download fonts to the printer’s memory or to a hard disk installed or
connected to the printer when you don’t want to download fonts for each
document. Manually downloading fonts can speed printing.
Note: The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS has a set of built-in fonts that do not
need to be downloaded. These fonts are listed in Appendix A.
Whether it is better to let Windows download fonts automatically or to
manually download fonts yourself depends on the number and frequency
with which fonts are used in a document and the size of your printer’s
memory or hard disk.
Downloading a Type 1 font to a PostScript printer usually takes from 15 to 20
seconds. When a program prints a document containing a font that is not
resident in your printer, Windows automatically downloads the font with the
document. However, after the document prints, any fonts that have been
downloaded with the document are cleared from the printer’s memory. This
means that each time you print a document that contains fonts not resident in
the printer, the fonts must be downloaded.
190
Chapter 7
By contrast, when you manually download a Type 1 font with the Font
Downloader, the font remains in printer memory (RAM) until you switch off
or restart the printer or when memory limitations are exceeded. Manually
downloading frequently used fonts therefore reduces printing time because
the fonts do not have to be sent to the printer each time they are used. Keep in
mind, however, that fonts manually downloaded to RAM reduce the overall
amount of memory available for printing and so may affect the printing of
documents that do not contain the downloaded fonts.
When you manually download a Type 1 font to a hard disk attached to the
printer, the font is available to the printer and no longer has to be
downloaded. This can speed up printing.
In addition to downloading fonts, you can also use the Font Downloader to
perform various printer management tasks, such as listing and removing
downloaded fonts, manually downloading PostScript language files, clearing
the printer font cache, and resynchronizing your printer with the Windows
driver.
See your network administrator for more information about performing these
tasks on your network, or choose the Help button in the Font Downloader
dialog box to see instructions for these tasks.
Downloading fonts manually to RAM or to the hard disk
Fonts need to be downloaded only once. Users who want to use fonts that
have already been downloaded should use the Job Control tab dialog box
(described later in this chapter) to turn on Do Not Download Fonts.
Otherwise, the fonts will be downloaded again, wasting time and system
resources.
Before you begin If you are downloading fonts to a hard disk, you must add the
hard disk to the device list (and initialize it if necessary), as explained later in
this chapter.
1
From the Program Manager, open the Control Panel.
2
Double-click the Printers icon.
The Printers dialog box appears.
Windows and DOS Users
191
3
If it is not already selected, select the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS from the Installed
Printers list.
4
Click Setup.
The Setup dialog box appears.
Note: You can also open the Setup dialog box from within many Windows
programs. Check your program documentation to see if you can change your
printer setup from within your program.
5
Click Fonts.
6
Click Font Downloader.
The Font Downloader dialog box appears.
7
Select the destination device from the list box.
To download to RAM, choose “memory,” or to download to a hard disk,
choose the name of the hard disk.
8
Select the fonts you want to download from the Fonts Available list.
Fonts that are already present in the printer’s ROM do not need to be
downloaded. For a list of these fonts, see Appendix A or print a list of font
samples by choosing Print Font Samples in the Apple Printer Utility
for Windows.
9
Click Download.
The Downloader informs you of its progress as it downloads fonts.
Note: While downloading, you can use other programs, but you can’t print.
10
After you are finished downloading fonts, click Exit.
You are returned to the Setup dialog box.
11
Click OK to close the Setup dialog box.
12
Click Close to close the Printers dialog box.
13
Choose Exit from the Settings menu to close the Control Panel.
You can confirm that the fonts were downloaded by printing a list of font
samples with the Apple Printer Utility for Windows.
192
Chapter 7
Using a hard disk
You can add an internal or external hard disk to the Color LaserWriter 12/600
PS. A hard disk can store many soft fonts so they don’t need to be downloaded
each time you use them, thus expediting your printing. Chapter 5 explains
how to install a hard disk.
After the hard disk is installed, you must add it to the device list and initialize
it, as explained in the next two sections.
Adding a hard disk to the device list
1
From the Program Manager, open the Control Panel.
2
Double-click the Printers icon.
The Printers dialog box appears.
3
If it is not already selected, select the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS from the Installed
Printers list.
4
Click Setup.
The Setup dialog box appears.
Note: You can also open the Setup dialog box from within many Windows
programs. Check your program documentation to see if you can change your
printer setup from within your program.
5
Click Fonts.
6
Click Font Downloader.
The Font Downloader dialog box appears.
7
Click Device Installer.
A dialog box opens.
Windows and DOS Users
193
8
Click Add New.
Another dialog box opens.
9
Make sure “Magnetic disk” is selected, then click Add.
10
Complete the dialog box as follows:
m Fill in the Available Memory box with the number of kilobytes your hard
disk can store.
m If you have Font Metrics files for the fonts, you can check the Read Font
Metrics Files checkbox.
m Make sure the Volatile checkbox is not checked.
m Make sure the Writable checkbox is checked.
11
Click Add.
A dialog box opens.
12
Type a name for the hard disk.
13
Click a button to indicate which SCSI number the hard disk has.
If it’s an internal hard disk, the SCSI number is 0.
14
Click OK.
You return to the Device Installer dialog box.
15
Click Close.
If the hard disk installed is already initialized in Apple HFS format, you can
now download fonts. If not, go on to initialize the hard disk.
194
Chapter 7
Initializing the hard disk
If you attach a hard disk to the printer to store fonts, you must initialize it (if
it is not already in Apple HFS format) before you can use it. You can do so by
following the steps below.
WARNING Initializing the hard disk erases all the data on it. Initialize the
hard disk only if you’re sure it’s new or if it’s OK to erase it.
1
From the Program Manager, open the Control Panel.
2
Double-click the Printers icon to display the Printers dialog box.
3
If it’s not already selected, select the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS from the Installed
Printers list.
4
Click Setup.
The Setup dialog box appears.
Note: You can also open the Setup dialog box from within many Windows
programs. Check your program documentation to see if you can change your
printer setup from within your program.
5
Click the Fonts tab.
6
Click Font Downloader.
The Font Downloader dialog box appears.
7
Click Other.
A dialog box opens.
8
Click the Format Device button, then click OK.
9
Select the disk name and click OK.
Initializing the hard disk takes a few minutes. The Ready/In Use light on the
printer blinks until initialization is complete.
Windows and DOS Users
195
Printing to a PostScript file
As an alternative to printing your document on the printer, you can save a
PostScript language description of your document as a disk file. PostScript
language descriptions of documents can be useful for
m creating document archives
m printing documents without using the program that created them (at a
service bureau, for example)
m diagnosing printing problems
You may also want to print an Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file. You can
use EPS files to export single pages from one program to another. EPS files
can include any combination of text, graphics, and images, but they do not
describe complete documents. For example, by saving an EPS file, you can
insert a page of a document created with one program as an illustration in a
document created by another program.
Note: PostScript files are normally ASCII text files that can be opened with
any word processing program. However, if you select the Send Data in Binary
option in the PostScript Options dialog box, the PostScript files may include
binary characters that make them unsuitable for use with a word processor.
You can use either of two methods to create PostScript files. If your program’s
Print dialog box has a Print to File checkbox, you can use this checkbox to
create a PostScript file; this is the preferred method. Refer to your program
documentation for information. If your program’s Print dialog box does not
have a Print to File checkbox, however, you need to make temporary changes
to your printer setup to create a PostScript file, as described next.
196
Chapter 7
Using the driver to print to a PostScript file
Using the driver to print to a PostScript file is a three-step process. First,
change your printer setup, then use your program to create the file, and finally
reset your printer setup for normal printing.
Step 1: Changing your printer setup to print to a PostScript file
1
From the Program Manager, open the Control Panel and double-click the Printers icon.
The Printers dialog box appears.
2
If it is not already selected, select the name of the PostScript printer that you are using
from the Installed Printers list.
3
Select Connect.
The Connect dialog box appears.
4
Select FILE from the Ports list box.
You may have to scroll through the list to find this selection.
5
Choose OK to close the Connect dialog box and return to the Printers dialog box.
6
Choose Setup.
The driver Setup dialog box appears.
7
After changing (or confirming) your printer settings, choose OK to close the dialog box.
Note: Choose settings in the PostScript Options dialog box that will produce
a file that prints correctly on the destination printer. For example, select the
“Use PostScript Level 2 Features” option if you are sure that you will be
printing the file only on Level 2 printers, such as the Color LaserWriter
12/600 PS. If you plan to use a printer that does not support binary
communication, disable the “Send Data in Binary” option. Selecting the
“Optimize for Portability” option creates PostScript files that print
successfully from different programs on a wide variety of printers and
imaging devices; it is recommended that you enable this option.
8
Choose Close to close the Printers dialog box.
9
Choose Exit from the Settings menu to close the Control Panel.
Your computer is now set up to create PostScript files when you choose the
Print command from a Windows program.
Windows and DOS Users
197
Step 2: Printing to a PostScript file
1
Start the program and open the document for which you want to create a PostScript file.
2
If necessary, select the Print Setup command from the File menu, change the settings as
appropriate, and select OK.
3
Select the Print command from the File menu.
Your program’s Print dialog box appears.
4
Choose OK.
A dialog box appears that asks you to name the file.
5
Enter a pathname and filename for the file.
If you don’t specify a pathname, the PostScript file is placed in your program’s
default directory.
6
Choose OK.
The PostScript file is created, and you are returned to your program.
Step 3: Restoring your printer setup options
After creating PostScript files, you need to restore your original printer setup
options before you can use your printer again.
1
From the Program Manager, open the Control Panel.
2
Double-click the Printers icon.
The Printers dialog box appears.
3
If it is not already selected, select the printer model from the Installed Printers list.
4
Choose Connect.
The Connect dialog box appears.
5
In the Ports list box, select the port to which your PostScript printer is connected.
6
Choose OK.
The Connect dialog box closes, and you are returned to the Printers
dialog box.
198
Chapter 7
7
If you changed any printer settings to print to file, choose Setup to display the Setup
dialog box. Undo any changes you made and then choose OK.
The Printers dialog box appears.
8
Select OK to close the Printers dialog box.
9
Choose Exit from the Settings menu to close the Control Panel.
DOS notes
If you are using DOS programs, refer to the manual that came with your
program and follow the instructions for using a PostScript printer. Most DOS
programs are PostScript compatible.
Capturing a print queue for DOS printing
From DOS, you can use the NetWare CAPTURE command to map the
parallel port to a print queue.
m Log in to the NetWare network and enter the CAPTURE Command, using the
following syntax:
CAPTURE /q=queue_name local=lptnumber server=server_name
job=new
Unless you specify otherwise, the command assumes that you are mapping
the LPT1 port to a queue.
Using the Apple Printer Utility for Windows
The Apple Printer Utility program supplied with the printer software lets the
printer administrator control various aspects of how the printer works. For
information about installing and using the Apple Printer Utility for Windows,
see Chapter 3.
Windows and DOS Users
199
8
UNIX Users
The details of setting up your UNIX workstation depend on which type of
UNIX you’re running. In most cases, the setup requires superuser privileges
and knowledge of the /etc/hosts and /etc/printcap files and should
be done by your local network or printer administrator, as described in
Chapter 4.
Once this setup is complete, your network or printer administrator will tell
you the name of the printer’s local print queues and what sort of documents
should be sent to which queue.
201
Printing from a UNIX workstation to the printer
You don’t need any special software to use the printer. On most UNIX
systems, you use either the lpr or lp command to print documents over a
TCP/IP network to the printer. (The documents must be in PostScript
format.)
Example for lpr
lpr -PKeithsLW file.ps
Example for lp
lp -d KeithsLW file.ps
The way you print and choose printing options can differ from one
application program to another. To find out more about printing from your
application programs, read the documentation that came with the programs.
202
Chapter 8
9
Loading Paper
This chapter describes how to load the standard paper cassette and the
multipurpose tray with paper. It describes how to load plain paper, letterhead,
three-hole punched paper, and transparencies for printing.
You can purchase additional printing options for use with your Color
LaserWriter 12/600 PS, including a 250-sheet feeder, which contains a
universal cassette. (You can also buy the universal cassette as a separate
optional item and use it instead of the standard paper cassette that came with
the printer.) For instructions on attaching options, see Chapter 5.
The way you control the printer from your computer depends on the type of
computer and program you are using. For general information about printing
with a Macintosh, see Chapter 6. For information about printing with an IBM
PC or compatible computer using Microsoft Windows, see Chapter 7. For
specific information about printing with a particular program, refer to the
documentation that came with the program.
WARNING The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS is not designed to handle
printing on envelopes or labels. Those materials could cause damage to
the printer.
203
Choosing paper
The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS produces the best results on paper labeled
“laser-quality” (16- to 24-pound stock). The printer can accept stock of up to
28 pounds from the multipurpose tray.
To avoid paper problems, keep the following potential trouble sources
in mind:
m Temperature Some letterheads are printed with low-temperature dyes that
vaporize and smear at the temperatures inside the printer. Some glossy,
coated letterheads may lose their coating in the printer. Using high-quality
stationery should ensure satisfactory results.
m Paper texture The printer may not print well on rough or highly textured
paper. Try a few sheets to test the quality.
m Paper finish The printer may not print well on some papers with a glossy
finish. Again, test a few sheets of any unusual paper stock you wish to use.
m Paper color The printer expects white paper and prints colors based on that
assumption. If you use colored paper, you should expect peculiar results.
It is always best to use off-the-shelf paper products rather than unusual types
of paper.
The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS produces high-quality transparencies for
overhead projection. If you experience difficulties when attempting to print
transparencies with automatic feed, use manual feed instead.
Automatic or manual printing with the printer
You can automatically print using paper from the paper cassette or using
paper or transparencies stacked in the multipurpose tray. You can also
manually feed paper and transparencies into the printer using the
multipurpose tray.
For information about selecting automatic or manual paper feeding, or
selecting the cassette or multipurpose tray to print from:
m If you have a Macintosh, see “Printing” in Chapter 6.
m If you have an IBM PC or compatible computer using Microsoft Windows,
see “Printing from Windows Applications” in Chapter 7.
204
Chapter 9
Using the standard paper cassette
The standard paper cassette holds up to 250 sheets of paper. You can fill the
cassette with U.S. letter-size paper (or A4 paper, depending on the type of
paper cassette you have). You can use plain paper, letterhead paper, or threehole punched paper. To refill the paper cassette, insert paper as shown in the
following illustrations.
Do not stack paper
higher than this point.
Slide paper under the retainers.
Load three-hole punched
paper with the holes toward
the back of the cassette.
Load letterhead paper face up.
C
AB
Make sure paper fits under
these corner brackets.
You can push the paper down,
but don’t overload the cassette.
Loading Paper
205
Using the multipurpose tray
The multipurpose tray is built into the printer. You can use the multipurpose
tray for automatic and manual feed printing.
Opening the multipurpose tray
To use the multipurpose tray you must first open it. Pull on the latch at the
top of the tray and then lower the tray slowly. Pull open the extension to
adjust the tray so that your paper does not extend over the edge.
Pull the extension all the
way out, then press gently
to lock it in place.
The extension can
support a stack of up to
100 sheets of paper
or 50 transparencies.
The multipurpose tray
flips down.
The guides slide to rest
against paper or transparencies.
206
Chapter 9
Placing paper and transparencies in the multipurpose tray
You can use the multipurpose tray for all your printing jobs. You can keep
a small stack of paper in the tray and let the printer feed the paper
automatically, or you can use the multipurpose tray for manual feed printing.
With the Auto Select feature on in the Print dialog box, the printer draws
paper automatically from any source that holds the correct size paper. To tell
the printer the size of paper in the multipurpose tray, use the Apple Printer
Utility. The printer software can then determine correctly when to draw paper
automatically from the multipurpose tray. For more information about
defining the size of paper in the multipurpose tray, see Chapter 2 if you have
a Macintosh, or Chapter 3 if you have an IBM PC or compatible computer.
Do not stack paper
higher than this line.
Slide the width guides
so they rest against the
paper. If the paper bows
out even slightly, the
guides are too tight.
Insert the paper, top first, face down,
as far as it can go inside the printer.
For manual-feed printing, place a single sheet of paper or transparency film in
the multipurpose tray.
The multipurpose tray holds up to 100 sheets of paper. When the printer
expects to find paper in the tray (for example, during a manual feed print job),
the Paper Out light comes on to let you know that you should put paper in
the tray.
By the way: You can have the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS print using a first
sheet from the multipurpose tray and remaining sheets from a paper cassette
(or vice versa.) For example, you can place letterhead paper in the
multipurpose tray and use it for printing the first page of a letter, and print all
following pages on plain paper from the standard paper cassette (or the
optional feeder, if you have one installed).
Loading Paper
207
For more information about selecting paper trays for printing, see Chapter 6 if
you use a Macintosh or Chapter 7 if you use an IBM PC or compatible
computer.
Tips for avoiding problems
Here are some suggestions to help you avoid problems with paper jams:
m Make sure the paper lines up straight and doesn’t enter the printer skewed
at an angle.
m Make sure the paper guides keep the paper evenly aligned, but don’t set the
guides so tight that the paper stack bulges.
m Make sure the paper is as flat as possible; if the leading edge is curled,
straighten it out before you put it in the multipurpose tray.
Loading three-hole punched paper in the multipurpose tray
You can load a stack of three-hole punched paper in the multipurpose tray for
automatic printing. You can also print on three-hole punched paper manually
by feeding one sheet at a time.
This illustration shows how to load a stack of three-hole punched paper in the
multipurpose tray.
Place three-hole punched paper
so the holes line up along this
edge of the tray.
Slide the width guides so they
rest against the paper.
If the paper bows out even
slightly, the guides are too tight.
208
Chapter 9
Loading letterhead paper in the multipurpose tray
You can load a stack of letterhead in the multipurpose tray for automatic
printing. You can also print letterhead manually by feeding one sheet at a
time.
This illustration shows how to load a stack of letterhead in the multipurpose
tray.
C
BA
Place letterhead paper
face down in the tray, with
the top of the paper “in”
(closest to the printer).
Slide the width guides so
they rest against the paper.
If the paper bows out even
slightly, the guides are too tight.
Loading Paper
209
Loading transparencies in the multipurpose tray
You can load one transparency at a time into the multipurpose tray for
manual printing, or you can place a stack of about 50 transparencies in the
tray for automatic feed.
IMPORTANT When you print overhead transparencies, use the multipurpose
tray. (This helps avoid paper jams.) Use only Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
Transparencies Letter or Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS Transparencies A4
with this printer. (See Appendix A for information about ordering these
products.) The printer may not print on other types of transparencies, and
quality will suffer. Use the face-down tray (on top of the printer) for
delivering printed transparencies. If you use the face-up tray, be sure to
remove each printed transparency from the face-up tray before you print
another one.
To make sure the edges are
aligned, gently tap the stack of
transparencies on a flat surface.
Fan the edges of the stack
before you insert it.
To avoid leaving fingerprints (and ensure the best image quality), handle
transparencies by their edges.
210
Chapter 9
IMPORTANT Insert transparencies so the white strip goes into the printer first.
Some transparencies have short strips that don’t extend fully across the page.
Align these transparencies with the short strip on the left-hand side of the
stack. Inserting transparencies incorrectly causes them to jam.
Slide the width guides
so they rest against the
transparencies. If the
transparencies bow out
even slightly, the
guides are too tight.
Load transparencies so the white strip
goes into the printer first.
If a transparency has a partial strip, align
the strip on the left as it goes into the printer.
Use only transparencies recommended
for use in the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS.
If a transparency has a full-width paper strip,
make sure the paper side is up as it goes
into the printer.
Loading Paper
211
Loading the optional 250-sheet universal cassette
1
Slide the cassette out of the printer. (It may be in the optional sheet feeder.)
2
Set the width guide to match your paper’s width.
The cassette is marked with positions for paper of U.S. letter, A4, B5, and
legal sizes.
3
Set the length guide to match your paper’s length.
L
LG
A4
R
LT
212
Chapter 9
4
Insert your paper within the guides.
Load three-hole punched
paper with the holes toward
the back of the cassette.
Do not stack paper
higher than this point.
Load letterhead
paper face up.
AB
C
5
Make sure paper fits under
these corner brackets.
Set the size guide on the front to match your paper’s size.
LGL
A4
LTR
B5
Size guide
Setting this guide indicates to the printer the size of the paper in the cassette.
6
Insert the paper cassette into the printer (or into the 250-sheet feeder).
Loading Paper
213
10
Maintenance
The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS is designed for trouble-free service.
Maintenance involves putting in a new toner cartridge when a color runs out,
replacing the bottle containing fuser oil, and replacing the photoconductor
cartridge and toner disposal box. In addition, there are a few minor cleaning
tasks you may want to perform.
The recommended service interval is 60,000 pages to check any service wear
on the fuser and associated parts. This service can be arranged through an
Apple-authorized service provider, or you can replace the fuser yourself. For
instructions on replacing the fuser, see Appendix F.
IMPORTANT You’ll find instructions for replacing toner cartridges, fuser oil,
and the photoconductor cartridge and toner disposal box in the packages that
contain the replacement items.
215
Safety first
The fuser assembly in the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS operates at very high
temperatures—around 400° F (204° C). Allow the rollers to cool 30 minutes
before performing maintenance and troubleshooting.
This area gets hot.
216
Chapter 10
Precautions during maintenance
To prevent damage to the printer while performing maintenance, observe the
following precautions.
m Don’t lubricate the printer.
m Don’t attempt to disassemble the printer.
m Don’t place anything on top of the printer.
These areas get hot.
Don’t touch the roller.
Maintenance
217
Regular maintenance
You can perform most regular maintenance tasks, replacing toner cartridges,
fuser oil, the photoconductor cartridge, and toner disposal boxes. In addition,
when the fuser wears out, you can replace it yourself, following the
instructions in Appendix F (or call an Apple-authorized service provider to
do it for you).
For information about ordering the replacement supplies, see Appendix A.
Low toner
The toner cartridges hold the toner powder that forms the printed images.
Each cartridge should yield about 4,000 pages. If you print many graphic
images, you may need to change cartridges more often. If your pages start to
look too light, or if you see thin vertical white lines in dark images, it may be
time to change the cartridge. Also, the status panel lets you know when toner
is low.
A light indicates
which color is low.
M
C
Bk
Y
!
When toner is low, the Alert light glows
and a toner light comes on.
When you see these lights, it can mean one of two things:
m The toner powder needs to be redistributed inside the toner cartridge.
m The cartridge needs to be replaced.
If the lights come on in the middle of a printing job, and the output is still
satisfactory, continue printing if you wish. You won’t harm the printer by
doing so.
218
Chapter 10
Check the status panel to see which toner color is running low. Then take
that cartridge out, rock it gently back and forth a few times (as described in
the cartridge installation procedure) to redistribute the toner, and reinsert the
cartridge. If the light goes out, you can continue to use the same cartridge. It’s
probably a good idea, however, to order or purchase a replacement cartridge
after this kind of early warning.
If the light stays on, change the cartridge. Instructions for replacing a
cartridge come in the package with the new cartridge.
IMPORTANT Use only an Apple Color LaserWriter Toner Cartridge with the
Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS.
Note: Don’t throw away used toner cartridges. See the instructions that come
with your new cartridge for information on how to return the used cartridge to
the manufacturer. By returning used cartridges, you help reduce waste and
preserve the environment.
Low fuser oil
When the bottle containing fuser oil is nearly empty, the Alert and fuser oil
lights glow. (When the fuser oil compartment is empty, the printer stops
working until you replace the oil.)
M
C
Bk
Y
!
When fuser oil is low, the Alert
and fuser oil lights glow.
Fuser oil
For information about ordering the replacement supplies, see Appendix A.
Instructions for replacing the fuser oil come in the package with the new
bottle of fuser oil.
Maintenance
219
Toner disposal box is full
When the toner disposal box is full, the Alert and toner disposal lights blink
(and the printer stops working). For information about ordering the
replacement supplies, see Appendix A.
Toner disposal box
M
C
Bk
Y
!
When the toner disposal box is full, the
Alert and toner disposal box lights blink.
Instructions for replacing the toner disposal box come in the package with the
photoconductor cartridge and two toner disposal boxes. (You use two toner
disposal boxes during the lifetime of one photoconductor cartridge. When you
replace a photoconductor cartridge, you also replace the toner disposal box.
Periodically, however, you must replace a toner disposal box without also
replacing the photoconductor.)
Note: Don’t throw away used toner disposal boxes. See the instructions that
come with the photoconductor cartridge for information on how to return
used toner disposal boxes to the manufacturer. By returning used toner
disposal boxes, you help reduce waste and preserve the environment.
220
Chapter 10
Photoconductor cartridge is wearing out
When the photoconductor cartridge is near the end of its life, the Alert
and photoconductor cartridge lights glow. When the photoconductor is
completely worn out, the printer stops working until you replace the
photoconductor cartridge. For information about ordering the replacement
supplies, see Appendix A.
M
C
Bk
Y
!
When the photoconductor is wearing out,
the Alert and photoconductor lights glow.
Photoconductor
cartridge
Instructions for replacing the photoconductor cartridge come in the package
with the new photoconductor and two toner disposal boxes. (You use two
toner disposal boxes during the lifetime of one photoconductor cartridge.)
If the light comes on in the middle of a printing job, and the output is still
satisfactory, continue printing if you wish. You won’t harm the printer by
doing so. The printer stops automatically if there is chance it could be
damaged.
Note: Don’t throw away the used photoconductor cartridge. See the
instructions that come with the new photoconductor for information on how
to return the used photoconductor to the manufacturer. By returning the used
photoconductor cartridge, you help reduce waste and preserve the
environment.
Maintenance
221
Fuser needs replacement
When the fuser is worn out, the Alert and fuser lights glow. As the fuser
approaches the end of its life, the status panel shows a warning, prompting
you to order a replacement kit. When the fuser is completely worn out, the
printer stops working.
For information about ordering replacement supplies, see Appendix A.
Fuser
M
C
Bk
Y
!
When the fuser is wearing out, the
Alert and fuser lights glow.
In Appendix F you’ll find instructions for replacing the fuser, together with a
transfer drum cleaning unit, a separation discharger, an ozone filter, and an
air filter.
Cleaning the exterior
Unplug the power cord and then wipe the exterior of the printer with a clean,
dry towel or lint-free paper. Don’t allow lint or foreign liquids inside the
printer.
Use a mild soap or detergent if necessary, but never use an ammonia-based
cleaner. Be careful not to get any liquid in the power cord port or anywhere
inside the printer.
WARNING Never use ammonia-based cleaners on or around the Color
LaserWriter 12/600 PS. They may react chemically with the toner and
with the printer’s plastic case.
222
Chapter 10
Cleaning the density sensor and separation discharger wire
Clean the density sensor and separation discharger wire regularly to keep the
printer running smoothly.
1
Open the printer’s door and top cover and remove the cleaning tool from its clips.
Cleaning brush
Maintenance
223
2
224
Chapter 10
Lightly brush off any dust that may have settled on the sensors.
3
Position the felt tips on either side of the separation discharger wire and run the tool
along the wire once or twice.
4
Replace the tool in its clips, close the top cover, and close the printer’s door.
Maintenance
225
Cleaning the paper pickup area
The paper pickup mechanism handles a lot of paper. Dust from the paper can
accumulate on the rollers and on the mechanism. It’s important not to let lint
or dust interfere with the operation of the printer. Take time to clean the
paper pickup area occasionally.
Wipe the area with a
clean, dry, lint-free cloth.
226
Chapter 10
11
Clearing Paper jams
This chapter provides solutions to problems you may encounter with paper
jams while using your Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS. The first section
discusses how to read the printer’s indicator lights to help you identify the
approximate locations of paper jams. The second section shows the steps for
clearing paper jams.
227
Checking the indicator lights for paper jams
When paper is jammed somewhere in the printer, the Paper Jam light glows
orange, and lights on the status panel indicate the location of access doors
near the paper jam.
M
C
Y
!
The lights on this diagram identify
the access doors nearest the paper jam.
Paper Jam light
If you see other lights flashing, see Chapter 10 or Appendix G for
information about the status panel.
m If you have connected an external hard disk, make sure it’s turned on.
m Check the technical specifications of the hard disk to make sure it supplies
at least 5 volts of termination power.
228
Chapter 11
Checking for and clearing paper jams
Paper jams can occur in three areas in the printer:
m where paper goes into the printer (pickup area and paper cassette)
m where printing happens (transfer drum)
m where paper comes out of the printer (fuser and output trays)
Face-down output tray
Printing and
transfer area
Fuser
Face-up output tray
Multipurpose tray
Standard
paper
cassette
Optional
250-sheet
feeder (with
universal
paper
cassette)
Paper pickup
access door
Paper pickup access
door on optional
250-sheet feeder
IMPORTANT If you experience paper jams after you first set up the printer,
check all areas of the printer to make sure that the cardboard and orange
plastic packing materials have been removed.
Clearing Paper Jams
229
Clearing paper from the paper pickup area
Make sure the multipurpose tray is closed before you open the door to the
paper pickup area.
The paper jam is in
the paper pickup area.
M
C
Bk
Y
!
Gently remove the jammed paper.
230
Chapter 11
If you can’t see or reach the jammed paper, pull the mechanism out for easier
access. After you remove the paper, slide the mechanism back into the printer.
IMPORTANT After you remove the paper, wipe off the rollers with a clean, dry,
lint-free cloth. (This keeps paper dust from accumulating.)
Clearing Paper Jams
231
If you still can’t find the problem in any of the places identified on the status
panel, the paper jam may be inside the paper cassette. (Sometimes a sheet of
paper gets tangled while still in the cassette.) Slide the paper cassette out of
the printer. Inspect the stack of paper, and remove any paper that is
misaligned.
Check both paper
cassettes and remove
any paper that is misaligned.
Standard paper
cassette
Universal paper
cassette
If you have installed an optional 250-sheet feeder, see “Clearing Paper from
the Optional Feeder,” later in this chapter.
232
Chapter 11
Clearing paper from the transfer drum
M
C
Bk
Y
!
The paper jam is in the transfer drum area.
You must open the front door and the top cover.
To unlock the transfer drum,
push this lever.
If you need to rotate the drum to release
the jammed paper, turn this knob.
Note: Don’t let loose toner get on
the window of the density sensor.
3
2
Gently remove the jammed
paper. You may have to pull it
loose from the small clips on
the drum. Pull the paper at a
slight angle (not straight up).
1
Clearing Paper Jams
233
If you can’t see the paper when you rotate the transfer drum, close the locking
lever, close the top cover, and close the printer’s door. Then open the access
door to the paper pickup area and look for the paper jam there.
Clearing paper from the fuser
M
C
Bk
Y
!
The paper jam is in
the fuser area.
1
234
Chapter 11
If it’s open, close the face-up output tray.
2
Open the fuser access door.
To move the paper toward
you, press and release this
lever. Repeat until the paper
is completely out.
Don’t pull the paper too hard.
If the paper tears, it is more
difficult to remove.
3
Remove the jammed paper.
If the paper is hard to see or reach, you can open the guide cover for easier
access.
Open the guide cover.
Press the release lever.
Don’t pull the paper too hard.
If the paper tears, it is more
difficult to remove.
4
Close the fuser access door and resume printing.
Clearing Paper Jams
235
Clearing paper from the optional feeder
The optional 250-sheet feeder has its own paper pickup area where paper
may get jammed.
M
C
Bk
Y
!
The paper jam is in the paper pickup
area on the optional 250-sheet feeder.
If you can’t find the paper jam, close the access door and open the paper
cassette. (Paper might get caught just as it’s leaving the paper cassette.) Slide
the paper cassette out of the printer. Inspect the stack of paper, and remove
any paper that is misaligned.
236
Chapter 11
12
Fixing Image Problems
This chapter suggests ways you can improve the quality of images printed on
your Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS.
m The first section describes general problems with print quality.
m The second section deals with problems printing in color.
General print quality problems
Print is faded.
If areas of your printed page are too light or colors are missing, try these
steps:
m Redistribute toner in the related toner cartridge. Remove the cartridge from
the printer and shake it gently.
m If the toner cartridge is empty, replace it.
m Clean the density sensor with the brush. (For instructions, see Chapter 10.)
m Try printing on a high-quality paper to see if that helps.
237
Spots or blotches appear on printed pages.
Try these steps:
m Try printing on a high-quality paper to see if that helps.
m Make sure you’re printing the image on the correct side of the paper.
m Replace the toner cartridge containing the relevant color.
m Clean the inside of the printer to remove paper dust and toner particles.
(See “Cleaning the Paper Pickup Rollers” in Chapter 10 for instructions.)
m Replace the photoconductor cartridge.
Vertical lines (black or blank) appear on consecutive pages.
Try these steps:
m Replace the toner cartridge containing the relevant color.
m Replace the photoconductor cartridge.
m Clean the rollers inside the printer. (For instructions, see Chapter 10.)
Spots, blotches, or blank areas appear on consecutive pages.
Try these steps:
m Try printing on a high-quality paper to see if that helps.
m Replace the toner cartridge containing the relevant color.
m Replace the photoconductor cartridge.
m Clean the separation discharger wire. (For instructions, see Chapter 10.)
Blank areas appear in an area that should be printed.
Try these steps:
m Replace the toner cartridge containing the relevant color.
m Try printing on a high-quality paper to see if that helps.
m Make sure you’re printing the image on the correct side of the paper.
m Replace the photoconductor cartridge.
238
Chapter 12
A page prints completely black.
Try these steps:
m Make sure the photoconductor cartridge is properly installed. (For
instructions, see Chapter 1.)
m Replace the photoconductor cartridge.
m Call an Apple-authorized service provider.
A page prints completely blank.
Try these steps:
m Make sure the sealing tape has been removed from the toner cartridge. (For
instructions, see Chapter 1.)
m Replace the toner cartridge.
m The printer may have picked up two sheets of paper and printed on one but
not the other.
m Call an Apple-authorized service provider.
Some printed segments in a page appear faded.
Try these steps:
m Make sure the paper is not damp.
m Try printing on a high-quality paper to see if that helps.
Fixing Image Problems
239
Stains appear on the back of a printed page.
Try these steps:
m Clean the separation discharger wire. (For instructions, see Chapter 10.)
m Clean the density sensor. (For instructions, see Chapter 10.)
m Try printing on a high-quality paper to see if that helps.
m The transfer cleaning brush may need to be replaced. Call an Appleauthorized service provider.
Flakes of toner come off the printed page.
Try these steps:
m Make sure you removed the two orange spacers from the fuser area when
you unpacked and set up the printer. (For instructions, see Chapter 1.)
m Try printing on a high-quality paper to see if that helps.
m Replace the photoconductor cartridge.
m Call an Apple-authorized service provider.
240
Chapter 12
Color print quality problems
Horizontal bands appear on the printed page.
When you print solid color images you can expect some horizontal banding
(fine horizontal lines that are more obvious in solid color areas). To minimize
banding, try these steps:
m Banding is more likely with 30 to 60 percent print coverage. Try a different
pattern with more white space or more coverage.
m Use light background color, rather than dark.
m Replace the toner cartridge containing the associated color.
m Replace the photoconductor cartridge.
You cannot get smooth color gradients in printed pages.
Try these steps:
m Make sure the application program you’re using lets you print the colors
you want.
m Replace the toner cartridge containing the associated color.
m Replace the photoconductor cartridge.
White gap appears between adjacent color.
m From the Print Quality pop-up menu (in the Print Options dialog box),
choose Best.
m Change the colors. Choose colors that are closer to each other in the
spectrum. (For example, with red and green, there’s more white gap; with
blue and green, the white gap is reduced.)
Fixing Image Problems
241
Text or objects on the page are blurry.
The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS uses a compression scheme to provide 600
dpi, nearly continuous-tone color printing using as little as 12 MB of RAM.
Because of the compression, some details and fine lines in colored objects
can appear blurred. Try these steps:
m Add more RAM. If you’re printing legal-sized pages on a Color
LaserWriter 12/600 PS with 12 MB of RAM, the printer uses a different
compression scheme. If you increase RAM to 16 MB or more, the print
quality of legal-size pages improves.
m Use thicker lines or fewer colors. Solid colors such as black, cyan, magenta,
yellow, red, blue, or green look best.
m Use a different program. Image-manipulation programs may cause text and
fine lines to look blurry when printed. Use a word-processing, desktop
publishing, or illustration program.
“Drop-outs” appear on legal-size paper.
If you’re printing legal-sized pages on a Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS with 12
MB of RAM, the printer uses a different compression scheme. Small areas of
a legal-size document may not print because information has been lost during
decompression. If you increase RAM to 16 MB or more, the print quality of
legal-size pages improves.
242
Chapter 12
13
Troubleshooting
This chapter provides solutions to problems you may have printing with the
Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS from Macintosh, Windows, DOS, and UNIX
computers.
Note: For easier troubleshooting, it’s a good idea to turn off background
printing.
Problems covered in other places
For help in clearing a paper jam, see Chapter 11.
For suggestions to improve the print quality of documents you’ve printed, see
Chapter 12.
To diagnose and fix problems identified by the status panel on the printer, see
Chapter 10 or Appendix G.
243
Can’t communicate with the printer
If you cannot use the Apple Printer Utility to communicate with the printer
(for example, if you inadvertently turn off communication to all ports), you
must reset the configuration switch on the back of the printer.
Flip the switch to the left-hand position.
Then restart the printer and return the
switch to the right-hand position.
Can’t close the printer’s door
If something prevents you from closing the door, try these steps:
m Make sure the transfer drum lever is closed correctly. (See the illustration
“Anatomy of the Printer” that appears at the beginning of Chapter 1.)
m Make sure the fuser oil cover is closed.
m Make sure the top cover of the printer is closed.
m Make sure the disposal box cover is closed.
244
Chapter 13
Can’t turn the toner carousel
If you press and turn the knob, but the carousel won’t turn, press the toner
cartridge firmly to make sure it is installed all the way.
Macintosh troubleshooting
If you are using the printer from a Macintosh computer, use this section for
troubleshooting tips.
The Chooser does not appear in the Apple (K) menu.
If the Chooser isn’t listed in the Apple menu, the System file on your startup
disk may be outdated, or you may have removed the Chooser from the Apple
Menu Items folder in the System Folder on your startup disk. You can obtain
the current system software from an Apple-authorized dealer.
Make sure that you have only one System Folder on your startup disk.
Can’t find the printer driver icon in the Chooser.
Make sure that the LaserWriter 8 printer driver is properly installed. The
printer driver may be on your startup disk but may have been moved to the
wrong location. If necessary, drag the driver into the Extensions folder inside
the System Folder.
Also make sure that you have only one System Folder on your startup disk.
Refer to the information that came with your Macintosh.
The printer is not listed in the Chooser.
If you’ve selected the LaserWriter 8 icon but your Color LaserWriter
12/600 PS is not named in the list of printers, one of the following may be
the cause:
m The printer has been turned off. Make sure it is plugged in and turned on,
and wait for the startup page to print.
m The communication settings are not set correctly. See “Adjusting
Communication Settings” in Chapter 1 and “Viewing and Changing
Communication Settings” in Chapter 2. See “Can’t Communicate With the
Printer,” earlier in this chapter.
Troubleshooting
245
m Someone may have renamed the printer. (Check the startup page for the
printer’s name.)
m If you are using an AppleTalk network that contains zones, you may not
have selected the correct zone for the printer.
m There’s a problem in the network cable system somewhere between your
computer and the printer you want to use. Make sure that all the cables are
properly connected. If you still can’t resolve the problem, the printer’s
electronics or the network connector boxes may not be functioning
properly. Call an Apple-authorized dealer.
m The printer has the same name as other printers on the network. If that’s
the case, the printer automatically appends a number to the end of its name
when it’s turned on. The number may change each time you turn on the
printer. The printer administrator can change the name using the Apple
Printer Utility, as described in Chapter 2, or the Apple Printer Utility for
Windows, as described in Chapter 3.
m Check the Network control panel to make sure the correct network
is selected.
A desktop printer icon appears again as soon as you drag it to the trash.
You must always have at least one desktop printer icon. If you drag your last
desktop printer to the Trash, the computer instantly creates another one just
like it.
An X appears over the desktop printer icon.
The X indicates that the desktop printing software is not working.
m You may have started the computer using a different startup disk or
temporarily turned off all the software extensions. When you restart the
computer as usual, the icons will return to normal.
m You may have removed the desktop printing software that created the
printer icons. If you meant to do so, you can drag the icons to the Trash. If
not, you can reinstall the software as explained in Chapter 2.
246
Chapter 13
Apple Printer Utility can’t find an external hard disk.
You’ve attached an external hard disk to the printer. The Apple Printer Utility
can’t recognize an external hard disk if
m the disk has not been initialized
m you turned the disk on after turning on the printer
An “out of memory” message appears when you try to print.
The printer may have insufficient memory to print if
m the document contains too many fonts that need to be downloaded from
your computer to the printer
m the document contains complex images
m you use a lot of fonts in your document but have not selected Unlimited
Downloadable Fonts in the Page Setup Options dialog box
If a page contains very complex images, try to remove some of the complex
detail from that page (or spread the information over two pages) and try again
to print it.
If you encounter the “out of memory” message frequently, you can remedy
this by increasing the amount of memory in the printer or installing a hard
disk. See Chapter 5.
Options don’t appear in the Print dialog box.
Make sure the hardware options are properly installed in the printer, as
described in Chapter 5.
Open the Chooser and click the LaserWriter 8 icon. Click the Setup button,
then click Auto Setup in the dialog box that appears.
Background printing is disabled
If the Chooser shows background printing turned off, and the buttons are
dimmed so you can’t turn it on again, PrintMonitor has probably been
removed from the Extensions folder. On the disks that came with your
Macintosh, find the PrintMonitor and drag it to the System Folder on your
computer. (You need the original PrintMonitor along with Desktop
PrintMonitor in the Extensions folder.)
Troubleshooting
247
Nothing is printed; no paper comes out of the printer.
Try the following steps:
m Make sure the printer is turned on.
m If you are using background printing, check for error messages.
(Double-click the desktop icon for the printer you’re using.)
m If you have several printer icons on your desktop, make sure the one you
printed to is the same as the one where you’re looking for the printed
document.
m Try printing again, but select the Print Detailed Report option. (Choose the
Print command, click the Options button, then choose the Print Detailed
Report from the PostScript Errors pop-up menu.)
m Check the Chooser to be sure the printer is selected. Be sure to select the
printer’s name, as well as the LaserWriter 8 icon and, if necessary, the
AppleTalk network zone.
m Check the Paper Out light. If it is on, add paper and replace the paper
cassette. If it is blinking, make sure the paper cassette is securely in place.
m Check for a paper jam as described in Chapter 11.
m Check the network cables.
m Turn the printer off and back on. Check the startup page.
m Reinstall the printer software on your computer’s startup disk.
A message on the screen says the printer can’t print.
Try these steps:
m Make sure that the printer is turned on.
m Check the network cables.
m Make sure your startup disk has the LaserWriter 8 printer driver in the
Extensions folder, which is inside the System Folder.
m Make sure the printer is selected in the Chooser. Be sure to select the
printer’s name as well as the LaserWriter 8 icon and, if your network has
zones, the correct AppleTalk network zone.
m Make sure that the printer has paper correctly installed.
248
Chapter 13
Sometimes printing the first page takes longer than I expect.
The printer automatically goes into an energy-saving mode after it’s been idle
for a while. When you print while it’s in this mode, the printer takes about
three minutes to warm up before it can print the first page.
The printer administrator can adjust this feature by using the Apple Printer
Utility on a Macintosh computer (see Chapter 2) or the Apple Printer Utility
for Windows on a Windows computer (see Chapter 3).
IBM PC or compatible troubleshooting
If you are using the printer from an IBM PC or compatible computer, use this
section for troubleshooting tips.
A message on the screen says the printer can’t print.
Try the following steps:
m Make sure that the printer is turned on.
m Check the network or parallel cables.
m Make sure that the PostScript Printer Driver has been installed as
described in Chapter 7.
m You must send PostScript to the printer. PCL won’t work, and nothing
prints.
Nothing is printed; no paper comes out of the printer.
Try the following steps:
m Make sure the printer is turned on.
m If you’re using Novell NetWare 3.x, make sure banner pages are disabled.
m Send only PostScript files to the printer; do not send straight text or PCL
files.
m Check the “List of Printers” box to see that your printer is selected. See
Chapter 7 for details about installing and selecting the printer driver.
m Try printing the document again, but choose Download PostScript Error
Handling in the Printer Setup PostScript Options dialog box.
Troubleshooting
249
m Check the Paper Out light. If it is on, add paper and replace the paper
cassette.
m Check for a paper jam as described in Chapter 11.
m Check the printer cables.
m Check the position of the port configuration switch as described in
“Adjusting Communication Settings” in Chapter 1.
m Turn the printer off and back on. Check the startup page.
m Check the Protocol options on the PostScript tab dialog box. Choose
Serial/Parallel for a parallel connection, None for Ethernet. If you are
using a parallel connection, make sure Send Data in Binary is not selected.
m Reinstall the printer driver. See Chapter 7 for details about installing the
printer driver.
m Increase timeout values in the PostScript printer options tab dialog box.
m Check your NetWare configuration. Make sure the queue is set up and
captured. For RPRINTER, make sure that the dedicated print server is
running and connected. Make sure your Apple Printer Utility and NetWare
file server configurations match.
m In the Job Control dialog box, select Send Error Handler. Then try again to
print the job. If there’s a problem with the job, an error page is printed.
This lets you know that the printer’s working, but something’s wrong with
the job.
Sometimes printing the first page takes longer than I expect.
The printer automatically goes into an energy-saving mode after it’s been idle
for a while. When you print while it’s in this mode, the printer takes about a
minute to warm up before it can print the first page.
The printer administrator can adjust this feature by using the Apple Printer
Utility on a Macintosh computer (see Chapter 2) or the Apple Printer Utility
for Windows on a Windows computer (see Chapter 3).
My printer driver settings are ignored.
Some applications have built-in options such as orientation, scaling, and
number of copies that supersede those in the printer driver. See the
application’s manual to determine whether such options exist. If they do, they
override the printer driver settings. Consult the Read Me file that came with
your Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS for specific application incompatibilities.
250
Chapter 13
My printer won’t draw paper from the multipurpose tray.
You must use the Apple Printer Utility to tell the printer what paper size is
available in the multipurpose tray. Otherwise, the printer draws paper from
the paper cassette instead.
When I print a document in multipage layout, an error page is the only thing printed.
In the Job Control tab dialog box, select PostScript Header: Download Each
Job. The job should print properly. Do not click the Download Now button or
the problem may happen again.
Novell NetWare troubleshooting
My text documents print fine, but I have problems with spreadsheets and graphics.
If you’re using NetWare 3.x, make sure banner pages are disabled. Try
removing the banner page, auto-end capping, tabs expansion, and form feeds.
Use the DOS CAPTURE command to set the following printing options:
/nb /na /nff /nt /ti=30
If you’re using NetWare 4.x, banner pages must be PostScript.
UNIX troubleshooting
If you are using the printer from a UNIX workstation, use this section for
troubleshooting tips.
When I print a text file, the lines stairstep off the page.
You need to use a print queue that adds a carriage return at the end of each
line. To set up the print queue, the printer administrator follows the
instructions in “Getting UNIX Users Started Using the Printer” in Chapter 4.
To learn the names of your local print queues, see your printer administrator,
or look in your /etc/printcap file.
The document generates PostScript errors.
The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS is a PostScript-only printer. Before you can
print ASCII files, you must filter them into PostScript.
The banner page prints only the system and remote printer names.
The lpd printing protocol does not provide the user name or filename in a
way that can be included in the banner page.
Troubleshooting
251
Sometimes printing the first page takes longer than I expect.
The printer automatically goes into an energy-saving mode after it’s been idle
for a while. When you print while it’s in this mode, the printer takes about
three minutes to warm up before it can print the first page.
The printer administrator can adjust this feature by using the Apple Printer
Utility on a Macintosh computer (see Chapter 2) or the Apple Printer Utility
for Windows on a Windows computer (see Chapter 3).
I can’t ping the printer by IP name or IP address.
Follow these steps:
1. Try to ping yourself or another host. If this ping fails, your IP software
is not running, or your network is down.
2. Turn the printer off and then back on. This sometimes fixes the problem
itself, and it also causes the startup page to print. Use the startup page to
verify the printer’s IP address.
3. Verify that the IP address on the configuration page is identical to the IP
address in the /etc/hosts file.
4. Check the network cabling to make sure the printer is physically connected
to the network.
5. Make sure that the IP address is not a duplicate of one already in use on
the network.
252
Chapter 13
The BOOTP server is not responding.
If you chose to use a BOOTP server to assign the printer’s IP address while
setting up the printer, but the server is not responding, follow these steps:
1. Check the /etc/bootptab file to verify
m that the lp entry is a valid IP address and that it matches the address in
the /etc/hosts file
m the ha entry is the correct Ethernet address (found on the printer’s
startup page) with no colons separating the bytes
m the ht entry is either ether or ethernet
2. Turn the printer on and off and immediately verify that the bootpd is
running. On many UNIX systems, you can accomplish this by typing
ps -e or ps -ax at the UNIX prompt on the server. If the daemon is
not running, type bootpd -t15 or consult the UNIX man page on
bootpd.
3. Turn the printer off and then back on.
The RARP server is not responding.
If you chose to use a RARP server to assign the printer’s IP address while
setting up the printer, but the server is not responding, follow these steps:
1. Make sure that the server running RARP is on the same subnet as the
printer.
2. Check the /etc/ethers file to verify that it contains the correct
Ethernet address and hostname.
3. Check the /etc/hosts file to verify that it contains a valid IP address
and the same hostname as in the /etc/ethers file.
4. Verify that the rarpd daemon is running on the server. On many UNIX
systems, you can accomplish this by typing ps -e or ps -ax at the
UNIX prompt on the server. If the daemon isn’t running, type
/usr/etc/rarpd -a.
5. Turn the printer off and then back on.
Troubleshooting
253
Density control panel
The printer has been adjusted at the factory to produce the best possible
image quality. All Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS printers come with these
default settings in effect.
There are always small variations in color between different printers. If you
have two Color LaserWriter printers on the same network, you can use the
density control panel to make subtle changes to match the two printers.
Because the color-matching methods assume the printer is in the default
condition, changing the settings may produce images of an inferior quality. If
you want to perform your own color correction, however, you can use the
controls on the panel to adjust the color balance of each color.
1
Press the Color Select button to select the color you want to change.
M
COLOR
SELECT
2
C
Y
DEFAULT
Bk
ENTER
TEST
PRINT
To increase the density of the color, press the + button; to decrease the density, press
the – button.
The indicators light up to show progress toward increased or decreased color
density.
3
Press the Color Select button to select the color you want to change.
4
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each color you want to change.
5
When you are finished changing color density, press Enter.
6
Press Test Print to verify that the new settings are what you want.
These changes affect all print jobs from now on.
7
254
Chapter 13
To return to the default setting for a color, select the color and press the + and – buttons
together.
Appendixes
Appendix A Technical Information and
Printer Supplies
Appendix B Setting Up the Printer as an
ATPS Remote Printer
Appendix C Using Fonts With the Printer
Appendix D Working With ColorSync
Appendix E Packing and Moving the Printer
Appendix F Replacing the Fuser
Appendix G Diagnosing Problems for Service
Appendix H Removing the Macintosh Desktop
Printing Software
III
part
Appendix A
Technical Information and Printer Supplies
Specifications
Marking engine
m Canon HX LBP print engine
m 3 ppm in color
12 ppm in black, cyan, magenta, or yellow
1 ppm for a transparency
m 600 x 600 dpi with Color PhotoGrade
m Enhanced 600 dpi grayscale imaging (effective 200-line screen halftone,
122 gray levels)
Laser
m Type: Semiconductor laser GaAlAs
m Wavelength: 780 nm
m Output power: 1 mW
257
Controller
m AMD Am29030 25-MHz microprocessor
m 8 MB of ROM (including 39 Type 1 fonts)
m 12 MB of RAM (expandable to 40 MB)
m 128 KB parameter SRAM
m SCSI interface for internal/external hard disk(s)
m LocalTalk interface
m High-speed parallel interface (IEEE P1284 ECP, bidirectional)
m Ethernet interface with three protocols:
EtherTalk
Novell NetWare IPX (PSERVER or RPRINTER)
TCP/IP (BSD lpd)
m External Ethernet transceivers available for:
Thin Coaxial
Twisted Pair (10Base-T)
Thick Coaxial (IEEE 802.3 AUI)
m Two-position communication configuration switch
m All ports/protocols simultaneously active
m Color-rendering acceleration
m Data compression/decompression system
m Forgery tracking system
m Adobe PostScript Level 2 (version 2014)
Theory of operation
Here is an abbreviated summary of how the printer operates:
m Controller sends a compressed page to the video ASIC (application-specific
integrated circuit), which decompresses the page at once and sends it to the
laser circuitry in the engine.
m The laser, on a scan-line-by-scan-line basis, pulses color by color and
paints each successive layer of the image on the photoconductor drum. The
color order is magenta-cyan-yellow-black. Laser light hits the
photoconductor on all the dots where toner should appear.
258
Appendix A
m The toner carousel rotates to bring the appropriate color toner cartridge
into contact with the photoconductor. (This contact is between the toner
developer rollers and the photoconductor.) Toner jumps from the toner
charge to the photoconductor.
m At the same time, paper enters the system from the paper cassette and
wraps around the transfer drum. The paper is clipped onto the transfer
drum at one end and held around the drum by an electrostatic charge.
m When all applicable colors have been applied, the paper, released from the
transfer drum, exits through the hot fixing assembly rollers and out to the
top tray or face-up tray.
True 600 dpi printer
The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS is a true 600 dpi printer because every
aspect of its architecture is designed to a 600 dpi specification. In addition, its
multilevel capability can assign levels of color or gray (rather than simply on
or off) to each pixel, thereby further enhancing print quality.
Printer fonts
The following fonts are resident in the printer ROM:
m AvantGarde Book, AvantGarde BookOblique, AvantGarde Demi,
AvantGarde DemiOblique
m Bookman Demi, Bookman DemiItalic, Bookman Light, Bookman
LightItalic
m Courier, Courier Bold, Courier BoldOblique, Courier Oblique
m Helvetica, Helvetica Bold, Helvetica BoldOblique, Helvetica Narrow,
Helvetica Narrow Bold, Helvetica Narrow BoldOblique, Helvetica Narrow
Oblique, Helvetica Oblique
m Helvetica Condensed, Helvetica Condensed Bold, Helvetica Condensed
BoldOblique, Helvetica Condensed Oblique
m NewCentury Schoolbook Bold, NewCentury Schoolbook BoldItalic,
NewCentury Schoolbook Italic, NewCentury Schoolbook Roman
m Palatino Bold, Palatino BoldItalic, Palatino Italic, Palatino Roman
m Symbol
Technical Information and Printer Supplies
259
m Times Bold, Times BoldItalic, Times Italic, Times Roman
m Zapf Chancery MediumItalic
m Zapf Dingbats
Speed
m Prints 12 pages per minute maximum in black, magenta, cyan, or yellow; 3
pages per minute maximum in 2 or more colors using letter-size paper; and
1 transparency per minute. Actual speed depends on the images printed.
Printer life expectancy
m Minimum life expectancy is 5 years or 300,000 pages in black and white or
150,000 color pages, with no monthly page limit. Recommended
maintenance interval is 60,000 pages due to wear on fuser and rollers.
Toner cartridge life expectancy
m 4,000 pages per color when printing documents with average page coverage
of 5%
Photoconductor cartridge life expectancy
m 40,000 pages in black and white or 10,000 pages in color, continuous
printing
m 13,000 pages in black and white or 6,500 pages in color, intermittent
printing (that is, printing only single-page documents, an unlikely sitution)
Fuser oil life expectancy
m 10,000 pages
Fuser assembly life expectancy
m 60,000 pages
Transfer drum cleaner life expectancy
m 60,000 pages
Printing materials
Uses 16- to 28-pound laser-quality bond (60 to 90 g/m2). Accepts most
textured and colored stock. Accepts Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS A4 and
Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS Letter transparencies.
The paper used should not scorch, melt, transfer material, or release
hazardous emissions when heated to 200° C (392° F) for 0.1 seconds.
260
Appendix A
Paper sizes and capacity
Supports U.S. letter and A4 in the standard paper cassette. The paper cassette
holds 250 sheets of 20-pound (75 g/m2) paper. The multipurpose tray can
hold up to 100 sheets of standard U.S. letter paper, and other paper sizes up to
U.S. legal. Optional 250-sheet universal cassettes are available that support
letter, A4, B5, and U.S. legal paper sizes.
Suggested paper brands
Apple has tested the following papers and found them to be acceptable.
m Aussydat-lay (A4, France) 100 g/m2
m Boise Cascade Laser, 20 and 24 pound
m Classic Crest, 24 pound
m Hammermill Laser Print, 24 pound
m Legacy Laser Paper, 24 pound
m Nekoosa Laser 1000, 24 pound
m Neusiedler (A4, Austria) 100 g/m2
m Xerox 4024 (LTR and A4), 20, 24, and 28 pound
m Nekoosa Laser 1000, 24 pound
Recycled paper is not recommended. It tends to produce more paper dust,
degrading image quality and causing more frequent replacement of the fuser.
Transparencies
Use only Apple Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS Transparencies A4 or Letter.
Dimensions
m Height
18 in. (46 cm)
m Width
21 in. (54 cm)
m Depth
23 in. (58 cm)
Technical Information and Printer Supplies
261
Space requirements
6"
30"
12"
44"
Top view
16"
Side view
20"
Weight (printer body only)
m Approximately 110 lb. (50 kg)
Environmental information
Operating
m Temperature
50° to 86° F (10° to 30° C)
m Humidity
20 to 80 percent RH non-condensing (for optimum print
quality, operate at 35 to 70 percent RH)
Storage (toner cartridge and printer)
m Temperature
–4° to 104° F (–20° to 40° C)
m Humidity
10 to 95 percent RH non-condensing
Acoustic noise
m Standby, less than 45 dB
m Printing, less than 55 dB
Wait times
m Either 120 or 240 V, 3.5 minutes maximum
m Either 100 or 220 V, 4.5 minutes maximum
262
Appendix A
Voltage requirements
m 100 to 120 V (50/60 Hz)
m 220 to 240 V (50 Hz)
m Voltage tolerance ± 10%
Power consumption
Energy-saving mode
m Approximately 42 W (meets EPA Energy Star)
Standby average
m 100/120 V, approximately 215 W
m 220/240 V, approximately 238 W
Operating average
m 100/120 V, approximately 535 W
m 220/240 V, approximately 524 W
Maximum power consumption
m 100/120 V, approximately 1.1 KW
m 220/240 V, approximately 1.0 KW
About PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files
Installing the Macintosh printer software also installs PPD files to support the
following Apple LaserWriter printers:
m LaserWriter
m LaserWriter Plus
m Personal LaserWriter NT
m Personal LaserWriter NTR
m Personal LaserWriter 320
m LaserWriter II NT
m LaserWriter II NTX
Technical Information and Printer Supplies
263
m LaserWriter II NTXJ
m LaserWriter IIf
m LaserWriter IIg
m LaserWriter Select 360
m LaserWriter Select 360f
m LaserWriter Select 610
m LaserWriter Pro 400
m LaserWriter Pro 405
m LaserWriter Pro 600
m LaserWriter Pro 630
m LaserWriter Pro 810
m LaserWriter Pro 810f
m LaserWriter 16/600 PS
m LaserWriter 16/600 PS Fax
m LaserWriter 16/600 PSJ
m LaserWriter 4/600 PS
m Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
You can optionally install the Windows PPD files for these Apple LaserWriter
printers:
m LaserWriter Select 360
m LaserWriter Pro 600
m LaserWriter Pro 630
m LaserWriter 16/600 PS
264
Appendix A
RAM upgrade specifications
To increase the printer’s RAM, purchase SIMMs with the following
specifications:
SIMM dimensions
m Length: 107.95 mm +/- 0.20 mm (4.25 in. +/- .008)
m Height: 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) maximum
SIMM sizes and speeds
Size
Configuration
Speed
Connector type
1 MB SIMM
256 Kbit x 32 bit
60 ns or less
72-pin
8 MB SIMM
1 Mbit x 32 bit
60 ns or less
72-pin
16 MB SIMM
4 Mbit x 32 bit
60 ns or less
72-pin
Ozone emission
Ozone gas is emitted by almost all laser printers and photocopiers. Because
ozone can be an irritant, various regulatory agencies have established limits
regarding the amount of ozone to which employees may be exposed.
The current OSHA permissible limit for ozone is 0.1 parts of ozone per
million parts of air (ppm). The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS printer produces
quantities of ozone far below the current limit specified by OSHA.
To minimize ozone exposure, install the LaserWriter in a well-ventilated area.
If there are other laser printers or photocopy machines in the same area,
additional air circulation may be required. Do not place the LaserWriter in a
small, enclosed space that lacks adequate ventilation. Position the printer so
that the fan exhaust does not blow directly into anyone’s face.
Technical Information and Printer Supplies
265
Communication settings
The following table shows the default communication settings. For
information about using the configuration switch to adjust communications
settings, see “Adjusting Communication Settings” in Chapter 1. To change or
view the current communication settings, use the Apple Printer Utility on the
Macintosh (see Chapter 2 for details) or the Apple Printer Utility for
Windows on an IBM PC or compatible computer (see Chapter 3 for details).
Right switch position
These are the factory default settings:
Port
Mode
Data
Protocol
Parallel
On
AutoSelect
TBCP
Port
Interface
Mode
LocalTalk
LocalTalk
On
Ethernet
EtherTalk
On
Netware
On
TCP/IP
On
Parallel
266
Appendix A
Accessories
The following list includes both standard and optional parts.
Item
Part number
Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS Setup Kit
M3753G/A
Color LaserWriter Toner Cartridge, Cyan
M3757G/A
Color LaserWriter Toner Cartridge, Magenta
M3760G/A
Color LaserWriter Toner Cartridge, Yellow
M3758G/A
Color LaserWriter Toner Cartridge, Black
M3756G/A
Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS 250-Sheet Feeder
M3762G/A
Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS Universal Cassette
M3874G/A
Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS Internal Hard Disk Drive
M3875G/A
Color LaserWriter Photoconductor Replacement Kit
M3761G/A
110 V Color LaserWriter Fuser Replacement Kit
M3867G/A
220 V Color LaserWriter Fuser Replacement Kit
M4234G/A
Color LaserWriter Fuser Oil
M3755G/A
Color LaserWriter Transparencies A4
M3877G/A
Color LaserWriter Transparencies Letter
M3876G/A
Apple HDI-30 SCSI Cable
M2538LL/A
Apple Ethernet Thin Coax Transceiver
M0329LL/A
Apple Ethernet Twisted Pair Transceiver
M0437LL/A
Apple Ethernet AUI Adapter
M0432LL/A
Apple IEEE-1284 Parallel Cable
M4235ZM/A
Apple SCSI Cable Extender
M0208
Apple SCSI Cable Terminator II (Black)
M5871G/A
Technical Information and Printer Supplies
267
Supplies
In the U.S.A., for Color LaserWriter supplies direct from Apple, call
1-800-600-7805. For your reference, the product reorder numbers are listed
below.
In the U.S.A., to locate your local Apple-authorized reseller, call
1-800-538-9696 and ask for extension 525.
For optimal print quality, use Apple printer supplies.
268
Appendix A
Item
Reorder number
Color LaserWriter Toner Cartridge, Cyan
M3757G/A
Color LaserWriter Toner Cartridge, Magenta
M3760G/A
Color LaserWriter Toner Cartridge, Yellow
M3758G/A
Color LaserWriter Toner Cartridge, Black
M3756G/A
Color LaserWriter Photoconductor Cartridge Replacement Kit
(includes 2 toner disposal boxes)
M3761G/A
110 V Color LaserWriter Fuser Replacement Kit
M3867G/A
220 V Color LaserWriter Fuser Replacement Kit
M4234G/A
Color LaserWriter Fuser Oil
M3755G/A
Color LaserWriter Transparencies (Letter Size)
M3876G/A
Color LaserWriter Transparencies (A4 Size)
M3877G/A
Appendix B Setting Up the Printer
as an ATPS Remote Printer
Setting up your Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS printer as a remote ATPS
(AppleTalk Print Spooler) printer on a NetWare network requires minimal
configuration; most of the network printing capability is built into every
Macintosh computer. With the proper software and physical connections, a
Macintosh on a NetWare network can print to a NetWare-managed printing
queue that can be selected from the Macintosh Chooser.
IMPORTANT ATPS is a part of Novell’s NetWare for Macintosh NetWare
Loadable Module (NLM), which must be loaded and configured on your
NetWare server. The configurations described in this appendix can be
performed only after the Macintosh NLM has been installed.
269
Configuring ATPS for the first time on a NetWare 4 server
If you are setting up the printer for access by Macintosh computers on a
NetWare 4 network and this is the first time you are configuring ATPS, follow
these instructions.
You can configure ATPS from the server console or by running RCONSOLE
(remote console) from a client PC.
1
At the console prompt, type
load install
The Install utility starts, and a list of Installation Options appears.
2
Select the Maintenance/Selective Install option and press Enter.
An additional list of options appears.
3
Select Product Options from the list and press Enter.
A list of product options appears. If the Macintosh NLM is installed and
operating, a NW-MAC option will be available.
4
Select the NW-MAC option and press Enter.
A list of configuration options appears.
5
Select Configure Print Services and press Enter.
A list of print service configuration options appears.
6
Select Quick Configuration and press Enter.
A list of lookup parameter options appears.
7
Select the Printer Model entry and press Enter.
A list of printer types appears.
8
Select the LaserWriter Pro 630 option and press Enter.
This selection provides a printer type similar to the Color LaserWriter
12/600 PS.
9
270
Appendix B
In the lookup parameter list, change the zone name to the zone in which the printer is
currently located.
10
Select the Perform Lookup option and press Enter.
11
In the list of installed printers, locate and select the newly installed printer from the list.
(It should be identified as “Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS.”)
12
If necessary, edit the Spooler’s AppleTalk Name field and press Esc to complete the
setup.
Note: You can also edit information about the print server or spooler. See the
documentation provided with NetWare for more information.
13
Press Esc to exit the utility.
The NetWare for Macintosh Configuration screen appears.
14
Select Edit SYS:\SYSTEM\AUTOEXEC.BAT from the list of options and press Enter.
A window appears, displaying the file’s contents.
15
Insert the following line after the load afp statement:
load atps
This command instructs the NetWare server to load the ATPS service
automatically at startup time.
16
Press Esc until the Install utility quits.
17
At the system console prompt, type load atps and press Enter.
The service is loaded and immediately becomes available to network users.
A message appears confirming the loading, and the console returns to the
command line prompt.
Setting up the Printer as an ATPS Remote Printer
271
Configuring ATPS for the first time on a NetWare 3.x server
If you are setting up the printer for access by Macintosh computers on a
NetWare 3.x network and this is the first time you are configuring ATPS,
follow these instructions.
You can configure ATPS from the server console or by running RCONSOLE
(remote console) from a client computer.
1
At the console prompt, type
load install
The Install utility starts, and a list of Installation Options appears.
2
Select Product Options from the list and press Enter.
A list of product options appears. If the Macintosh NLM is installed and
operating properly, a NW-MAC option will be available.
3
Select the NW-MAC option and press Enter.
A list of configuration files appears.
4
From the list, select the file SYS:\SYSTEM\ATPS.CFG and press Enter.
A prompt appears, asking if you want to create a new file.
5
Type y and press Enter.
An empty window appears, providing an area in which to enter configuration
information.
272
Appendix B
6
Enter a line of configuration information for each Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS printer.
(Enclose the printer name and zone in quotation marks.)
Example
“Sales Printer:Ethernet Zone”
This example identifies the printer “Sales Printer” located in the zone
“Ethernet Zone.”
You can include a -h option at the end of the line to instruct ATPS to make
the printer unavailable for direct Macintosh printing; that is, the printer will
be accessible only through ATPS queues.
Example
“Sales Printer:Ethernet Zone” -h
Note: Other ATPS options are available for configuring the printer. See
Novell’s NetWare for Macintosh documentation for more information on these
options.
7
Press Esc to quit editing.
A prompt appears, asking if you want to save your changes.
8
Type y and press Enter.
The list of configuration files reappears.
9
Select the SYS:\SYSTEM\AUTOEXEC.NCF file and press Enter.
A window appears, displaying the file’s contents.
10
Insert the following line after the load afp statement:
load atps
This command instructs the NetWare server to automatically load the ATPS
service at startup time.
11
Press Esc to exit the editor, then type y and press Enter to confirm the changes.
12
Press Esc three times to exit the Install utility.
13
At the system console prompt, type load atps and press Enter.
The service is loaded and immediately becomes available to network users. A
message appears confirming the load, and the console displays its prompt.
Setting up the Printer as an ATPS Remote Printer
273
Modifying an existing ATPS configuration on a NetWare 3.x server
The procedure for modifying an existing ATPS configuration is similar to the
procedure for creating a new configuration. The primary difference is that
you are modifying an existing AUTOEXEC.NCF file instead of creating a
new one.
1
At the console prompt, type
load install
The Install utility starts, and a list of Installation Options appears.
2
Select Product Options from the list and press Enter.
A list of product options appears. If the Macintosh NLM is installed and
operating properly, a NW-MAC option will be available.
3
Select the NW-MAC option and press Enter.
A list of configuration files appears.
4
From the list, select the file SYS:\SYSTEM\ATPS.CFG and press Enter.
A prompt appears, asking if you want to create a new file.
5
Type y and press Enter.
An empty window appears, providing an area for entering configuration
information.
274
Appendix B
6
Enter a line of configuration information for each Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS printer.
(Enclose the printer name and zone name in quotation marks.)
Example
“Sales Printer:Ethernet Zone”
This example identifies the printer “Sales Printer” located in the zone
“Ethernet Zone.”
You can include a -h option at the end of the line to instruct ATPS to make
the printer unavailable for direct Macintosh printing; this makes the printer
accessible only through ATPS queues.
Example
“Sales Printer:Ethernet Zone” -h
Note: Other ATPS options are available for configuring the printer. See the
NetWare for Macintosh documentation for more information on these options.
7
Press Esc to quit editing.
A prompt appears, asking if you want to save your changes.
8
Type y and press Enter.
The list of configuration files reappears.
9
Press Esc until the Install utility exits.
10
At the system console prompt, type unload atps and press Enter.
This command unloads the previous version of ATPS configuration. Now you
you can reload ATPS using the modified configuration.
11
At the system console prompt, type load atps and press Enter.
The new configuration is immediately available.
Setting up the Printer as an ATPS Remote Printer
275
Appendix C
Using Fonts With the Printer
A font is a collection of letters, numbers, and symbols in a distinctive
typographic design. Your Macintosh computer and Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS
printer come with a variety of fonts that look great both on your monitor and
on paper.
Fonts come in such a variety of formats that problems can sometimes arise.
This appendix provides the information you need to avoid such problems and
to solve them if they come up.
Kinds of fonts
The Macintosh works with three main kinds of fonts: bitmapped, PostScript,
and TrueType fonts.
Apple provides two kinds of fonts with your Macintosh and the
Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS printer, bitmapped and TrueType. However,
your system can use PostScript fonts as well when it has the proper
software installed.
277
Bitmapped fonts
Bitmapped fonts consist of “pictures” of a typeface at specific sizes. For
example, you might have bitmapped fonts at 10-, 12-, and 18-point sizes
installed in your Macintosh computer. For best results you need a separate
font file for each size of character you want to use.
The icon of a bitmapped font (also called a fixed-size font or screen font) has
the single letter A on it. The font’s point size appears at the end of its name.
When you request a bitmapped character, your Macintosh looks for an
installed bitmapped font in the size you specified. (See “How the Macintosh
Looks for Fonts,” later in this appendix.) If it can’t find that font, your
Macintosh tries to construct one by scaling a size that it does find.
In most cases, scaled bitmapped fonts don’t look nearly as good as
preinstalled ones. Such scaling is one reason for the jagged edges (sometimes
called “jaggies”) you’ll see on your screen or in a printed document when you
request an uninstalled size (for example, 17-point Geneva).
Bitmapped fonts are designed on grids of 72 dots per inch (dpi)—the
standard Macintosh screen resolution. Because of their correspondence to the
standard screen resolution, bitmapped fonts in preinstalled sizes always look
great on your display.
When you print a bitmapped font, it prints at a resolution of 72 dpi. Because
most modern printers can print at resolutions far better than this (your
Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS prints at 600 dpi), printed bitmapped fonts
almost always have jagged edges or stairstep sides.
Fortunately, the Macintosh can use bitmapped fonts in combination with
other font formats, reserving bitmaps for the screen and other kinds of fonts
for the printer.
278
Appendix C
PostScript fonts
PostScript is a page-description language that defines the characters, symbols,
and images that appear on each page of a document. A PostScript font comes
as a pair of fonts: an outline font for the printer and a corresponding
bitmapped font for displaying type on your screen.
No bitmapped font, no menu entry: If your system doesn’t have the bitmapped
font, the PostScript font name won’t appear in your font menu.
The Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS is designed specifically to work with
PostScript fonts. Even printers that are not PostScript printers can use
PostScript fonts if you have Adobe Type Manager software installed. Adobe
Type Manager uses printer fonts to generate clean-looking screen text at any
size. (Adobe Type Manager is included with your Color LaserWriter 12/600
PS software.)
IMPORTANT Adobe Type Manager is not an Apple product. It is made and
supported by Adobe Systems Incorporated. Only the version that comes with
Apple Macintosh system software version 7.5 is supported by Apple.
PostScript printer fonts have no numbers associated with their names,
because a single font can be scaled to any size. Many companies make
PostScript fonts; the following illustration shows icons for Adobe, Bitstream,
and Fontek PostScript fonts, plus a generic PostScript font icon.
Using Fonts With the Printer
279
TrueType fonts
A TrueType font is scalable, describing a typeface without rigidly specifying a
size. So it looks good whatever size you choose. TrueType fonts provide sharp
text at any size on screen or on paper. You can mix and match TrueType fonts
from various font vendors.
TrueType fonts store individual text characters as mathematical descriptions
of lines and curves, rather than as groups of pixels (a bitmap). When a
program asks for a character in a particular size, such as 33 points, the
Macintosh uses mathematical calculations to enlarge the character’s outline
to 33 points and fill in the dots for the monitor or printer output.
Sometimes you’ll still get jagged edges when you print a document, even
when you use a TrueType font. In nearly all cases, this is because there isn’t
enough memory available to scale the font properly for printing.
Because you don’t need a separate font for each character size in order for
your printing to look good (as you do with bitmapped fonts), TrueType font
names don’t have numbers in them.
How does a font look? To see a TrueType or bitmapped font on your screen,
double-click the font’s icon to open it. A sample of that font appears (in three
sizes for TrueType fonts and in the size you opened for bitmapped fonts).
You can also use the Key Caps desk accessory to examine fonts. See the
documentation that came with your computer for instructions.
280
Appendix C
QuickDraw GX imaging technology
A QuickDraw GX font is a TrueType or PostScript font with an additional set
of sophisticated features. These features include extremely accurate
typographic elements such as ligatures and kerning, plus the ability to skew,
rotate, and add perspective to text in extremely flexible ways.
QuickDraw GX is more than a font format; it’s a sophisticated printing and
display technology that supports complex graphics and advanced typography.
How TrueType fonts work with other kinds of fonts
Although TrueType fonts offer distinct advantages, your Color LaserWriter
12/600 PS printer can also use other kinds of fonts.
TrueType and bitmapped fonts
Macintosh computers running System 7 come with both bitmapped (screen)
fonts and TrueType fonts installed. This maintains consistency with
documents created on Macintosh systems that don’t have TrueType fonts.
If both a TrueType and bitmapped version of the same font are available, the
Macintosh uses the bitmapped font (providing that the stipulated point size is
present). If you want the Macintosh to use the TrueType font, you need to
remove the bitmapped font from your system.
Using Fonts With the Printer
281
For example, if a document uses 12-point Times, available in that size as a
bitmapped font and as a TrueType font, the system uses the bitmapped font. If
a document uses 4-point Times, the system scales the TrueType font to that
size, because a bitmapped version isn’t available.
Using only TrueType fonts produces a closer match between the appearance
of type on the screen and on paper. However, a document you’ve already
created with bitmapped fonts will be reformatted with the corresponding
TrueType fonts, and line breaks in the document may change. Similarly, if a
document is created on a system that has TrueType fonts or Adobe Type
Manager software installed, it may have different spacing, kerning, and so on,
when opened on a system that doesn’t have TrueType fonts or Adobe Type
Manager software.
Keeping two font versions available
If you have a TrueType version of a font, you don’t need a bitmapped version.
However, although keeping both versions of a font takes up more disk space,
there are several advantages to doing so.
Bitmapped fonts are hand-designed: a graphic artist planned each character
in each font to look good on a screen. TrueType fonts are scaled by the
computer to match what you request. At smaller point sizes, the bitmaps may
appear sharper.
Additionally, scaling fonts takes time—sometimes up to several seconds in
slower Macintosh computers; but all Macintosh computers can display a
bitmapped font instantly.
282
Appendix C
TrueType and PostScript fonts
PostScript fonts were designed as fonts for PostScript printers. However, if
you have Adobe Type Manager software installed, your computer can both
display and print PostScript fonts.
Use different names: To avoid confusing the printer software, be sure that you
don’t install both TrueType and PostScript versions of the same font. For
example, do not have a PostScript font file called Times and a TrueType font
file called Times installed in your system at the same time.
How the Macintosh looks for fonts
Here’s the search order your Macintosh uses to determine which font to
display on your screen when you choose a specific size:
1. an installed bitmapped font in that size, if one exists
2. a scaled TrueType font, if no bitmapped font exists
3. an Adobe Type Manager (ATM) version of a PostScript font, if ATM is
installed and if no TrueType version exists
4. a scaled bitmap if no ATM font exists
Here’s the search order it uses to determine which font to print on your
Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS (or any PostScript printer):
1. the printer’s ROM
2. the printer’s RAM
3. the printer’s hard disk
4. the System Folder where it looks first for a PostScript version of the font,
then TrueType, and finally a bitmap version.
Using Fonts With the Printer
283
Where fonts are stored
All fonts for your Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS printer reside in special places
within the System Folder. To install fonts in System 7, you drag them to the
System Folder. Your Macintosh will automatically put them where they
belong.
In system software versions 7.1 and 7.5, all the fonts are installed in the Fonts
folder within the System Folder.
The Fonts folder can contain a total of 128 font suitcases (described in the
next section), plus any number of PostScript fonts, up to the available storage
capacity of your hard disk.
IMPORTANT Fonts installed in other folders or in the top level of the System
Folder may not work correctly. Additionally, bitmapped and TrueType fonts
stored outside of suitcases may not work correctly.
284
Appendix C
Suitcases
A font suitcase is a special folder for collections of fonts.
Suitcases provide a convenient way to organize fonts in the same font family.
For example, it’s a good idea to use a single suitcase (called Courier) for all
fonts in the Courier font family—all Courier roman fonts as well as fonts
with names like Courier Bold and Courier Oblique.
Note: PostScript fonts won’t go into suitcases; you can, however, organize
TrueType fonts in suitcases.
Using Fonts With the Printer
285
Combining suitcases: To merge all the fonts from one suitcase with another,
drag one suitcase on top of the other. All the fonts from the dragged suitcase
will go into the other, and the dragged suitcase will disappear.
A suitcase can also contain fonts from different font families, although you
should keep all fonts of the same family in the same suitcase. All the fonts
will still appear in menus with their proper names.
You treat a suitcase as you would a folder. To open a suitcase, you doubleclick it. To add a font, you drag the font’s icon to the suitcase and drop it in.
To remove a font, you drag its icon out of the suitcase.
To create a font suitcase, duplicate an existing one and throw away its
contents. Then rename the suitcase as appropriate and drag whatever fonts
you want into it.
You cannot have more than 128 font suitcases in the Fonts folder.
Size limits for suitcases: No matter how many fonts you have in a single
suitcase, the Fonts folder counts the suitcase as a single unit. There’s no limit
to the number of fonts in a single suitcase, but the suitcase cannot be larger
than 16 megabytes.
IMPORTANT PostScript fonts cannot be placed in suitcases; they appear as
individual files, loose inside the Fonts folder. Other than the limit imposed by
your system’s memory (RAM), there’s no limit on the number of PostScript
fonts you can have.
286
Appendix C
Styled fonts
Most fonts that come with your Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS printer have
defined styles. For example, if you open the Bookman font suitcase, you see
files for bold and italic versions of the font.
But fonts such as Chicago, Geneva, Monaco, and New York do not come with
defined styles. If you open the Chicago font (contained in a suitcase in the
Fonts folder, which is inside your System Folder), you see only one file.
You can apply a style to a font like this by making a choice from the
appropriate menu (Fonts, Style, Format, or some similar menu, depending on
the application program). A font predesigned with a given style nearly always
looks better than a font with a computer-generated “derived” style.
About style names: Predesigned styled fonts sometimes have names you may
not be familiar with. For example, roman refers to a font without styling, or
plain. Oblique is similar to italic. Light, demi, and extra are different states
of bold.
Using Fonts With the Printer
287
Common questions about fonts
Here are some questions that often come up about fonts.
What kind of fonts should I buy?
Bitmapped fonts are best for screen display but don’t look as good when you
print them. PostScript fonts look great on paper if you have a PostScript
printer or Adobe Type Manager.
TrueType fonts are the best all-purpose fonts to use for your Macintosh
monitor and non-PostScript printers. If you need to display fonts with
extremely accurate typographic features such as ligatures and kerning, install
QuickDraw GX on your system and buy QuickDraw GX TrueType fonts.
Why don’t all of my fonts appear in the Fonts menu?
You may not have all of your fonts placed correctly. In system software
versions 7.1 and 7.5, all the fonts should be installed in the Fonts folder in the
System Folder.
Additionally, some application programs let the user decide which fonts
should appear in the Fonts menu. Check the manuals that came with your
programs.
Why can’t I see my Monaco 9, Geneva 9 and 12, and Chicago 12 bitmapped fonts?
These fonts are used by your Macintosh to display information correctly.
Because the Macintosh needs these fonts, the Finder makes them invisible to
prevent users from removing them.
288
Appendix C
What does the term Apple classic fonts mean?
The Apple classic fonts are the original ten bitmapped fonts that came with
the first Macintosh in 1984. These fonts, which all have city names, include
Athens, Cairo (a picture font), Chicago, Geneva, London, Los Angeles,
Monaco, New York, San Francisco, and Venice. Several of the fonts (Athens,
Cairo, London, and San Francisco) came in only one size—18 points.
.
Chicago, Geneva, Monaco, and New York are currently available in TrueType
versions. The other classic fonts are still only available in bitmapped versions.
Why do I sometimes get Geneva or Courier in my printed documents when I have
specified other fonts?
Geneva often appears when you’re trying to use a TrueType font but don’t
have enough memory for scaling to operate properly.
Substitute fonts can also appear in a document composed on one Macintosh
that has a particular set of fonts but printed on another Macintosh that doesn’t
have those fonts.
Why does a document written entirely in Times look different on different Macintosh
computers?
Times, an extremely popular font, is manufactured and sold by more than one
company. Such fonts usually have small differences, even though they have the
same name. For example, the Times font manufactured by Adobe Systems
Incorporated has different letterspacing than does the Times font from Apple
Computer.
Using Fonts With the Printer
289
What is font substitution?
Font Substitution is an option in the Page Setup dialog box for certain
PostScript printers. When font substitution is turned on, these printers will
use their built-in equivalents for three bitmapped fonts (Times for New York,
Helvetica for Geneva, and Courier for Monaco).
What’s a downloadable font?
A downloadable font is a TrueType or PostScript font sent to an “intelligent”
printer by your system software. (An intelligent printer is one that has a
microprocessor built into it.) The printer then uses the font to print your
document.
If a printer has sufficient memory, it can hold more than one downloaded
font; otherwise, it must request the fonts it needs as necessary. This can be a
time-consuming process.
Some printers have hard disks attached to them for holding downloaded fonts.
A printer can get the fonts from its hard disk more quickly than it can
download them from the computer’s hard disk.
Your Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS printer can receive downloaded fonts.
290
Appendix C
Appendix D
Working With ColorSync
The Macintosh does a lot of work to make sure that the colors you see on
your monitor closely match the colors you get on your printers, scanners, and
other devices. The software that does this work is called ColorSync. Because
ColorSync does its work behind the scenes, you don’t have to know anything
about it. But if you’re curious, this appendix explains how ColorSync works
and how you can benefit from using it.
The problem that ColorSync solves
Providing consistent color with desktop computers is a technical challenge.
Reproducing colors consistently from device to device is difficult because
colored light on your monitor is very different from printed ink. Different
color devices use different methods for representing color information and
produce different ranges of colors.
Monitors (and most scanners) produce colors by mixing red, green, and blue
light–called RGB color. Most printers produce colors by mixing cyan (a
shade of blue), magenta (a bright pink), yellow, and black ink–called CMYK
color. Since monitors and printers have different color capabilities, they
cannot reproduce each other’s colors exactly.
In addition, no two monitors or printers produce exactly the same colors. (You
can see an example of the differences among television sets at a consumer
electronics store.)
291
About ColorSync
ColorSync is a system extension that provides color-conversion capabilities
and improves color consistency. ColorSync “translates” the colors used on one
device so that they match the colors displayed or printed on another device.
ColorSync color conversion is a central part of Macintosh computing,
ensuring that programs, monitors, printers, scanners, and digital cameras use
the same scheme for color conversion. This means you can scan an image,
display it on your monitor, and print it—with visually matching colors every
step of the way.
How ColorSync works
ColorSync does not convert colors directly from one device to another.
Instead, ColorSync takes information about each device’s color capabilities
and compares it to an independent color standard. In this way, it converts the
colors produced on one device to closely matching colors that can be
reproduced on another device.
Monitor
ColorSync profile
CIE color standard
ColorSync profile
1 ColorSync checks
a device’s ColorSync
profile for the device’s
color capabilities.
2 ColorSync translates
device-specific colors
to standard colors, which
are not limited by
the color capabilities
of any device.
3 If a device can’t
reproduce a standard
color, ColorSync
chooses the device’s
closest match.
Printer
ColorSync defines the colors a monitor, printer, scanner, or digital camera can
reproduce in a ColorSync profile. ColorSync profiles are compatible with the
profile specifications of the International Color Consortium (ICC).
Next, ColorSync converts device-specific colors into standard colors. The CIE
color standard describes colors in terms of how they are perceived by the
human eye under standardized lighting conditions. (CIE stands for the
Commission International de l’Eclairage, the International Commission on
Illumination, which founded the standard in 1931.)
292
Appendix D
To maintain consistency, ColorSync previews a device’s color capabilities (in
the ColorSync profile) and–where necessary–converts standard colors to
closely matching colors that the device can reproduce. For example, your
monitor may be able to display a vivid red, but your printer inks may not be
able to produce that color. ColorSync determines the “next best” color for
your printer to use.
Using ColorSync
The ColorSync profile for a device is automatically installed as part of the
device’s software. To get the best visual color matching on your system, make
sure the following monitor settings are selected:
m For the best color match when printing, select the “page-white” or “D50”
system profile for your type of monitor in the ColorSync System Profile
control panel.
m For the best visual match between the colors on your monitor and printed
colors, select the Page-White Gamma option in the Monitors control panel.
To select a gamma option, open the Monitors control panel, then hold
down the Option key while you click the Options button. In the Options
window, click the Use Special Gamma checkbox to put a check in it. Then
choose Page-White Gamma from the menu.
m On a multiscan monitor, make sure that the color temperature, or intensity,
is set to 9300 K (the default setting). See the monitor manual for
instructions. If the Page-White Gamma option is selected with a color
temperature other than 9300K, your monitor colors could look too red or
too blue compared to printed colors.
Some color devices allow you to set additional color options that affect the
way ColorSync converts colors. See the device manual for more information
about using ColorSync with the device.
Working With ColorSync
293
Appendix E
Packing and Moving the Printer
If you need to move your printer a long distance, follow these steps.
1
Turn off the printer and unplug it.
2
Remove any paper from the paper cassette amd multipurpose tray.
3
Remove the power cord and any cables connected to the printer’s ports.
4
Open the printer’s door.
5
Remove all four toner cartridges.
6
Put each cartridge into its original wrapping, or put it into a resealable plastic bag and
seal the bag.
295
7
Move the transfer drum lever to the right.
Push the transfer drum lever to the right.
8
296
Appendix E
Open the disposal box cover.
9
Tap the toner disposal box to settle the toner.
10
Remove the toner disposal box.
11
Put the plug into the opening in the toner disposal box.
The plug prevents loose toner from leaking out of the box.
The stopper is stored here.
Pull it loose and use it to
plug the opening.
12
Put the toner disposal box into a resealable plastic bag and seal the bag.
Packing and Moving the Printer
297
13
Remove the photoconductor cartridge.
Press the latch to release
the photoconductor.
Pull the photoconductor
out of the printer.
Squeeze the small latch and slide the photoconductor out of the printer.
14
Place the photoconductor in its orange tray and its original wrapping.
If you don’t have the original packaging, put the photoconductor into a black
plastic bag to protect it from exposure to light and contact with any abrasive
surface or lint.
298
Appendix E
15
Remove the fuser oil bottle.
Place the bottle in a resealable plastic bag and seal the bag.
Packing and Moving the Printer
299
16
Remove all the fuser oil from inside the printer.
First, use a lever inside the fuser access door to pump fuser oil from inside
the printer back into the fuser oil compartment. Then insert a turkey baster or
other blunt syringe into the fuser oil compartment and withdraw the oil.
To force fuser oil out of the
printer and back into the
fuser oil compartment, press
and release this lever 50
times (or more, if necessary).
IMPORTANT Do not use paper towels, tissues, or anything that leaves lint or
debris. It’s better to leave a small amount of oil than to get foreign matter into
the compartment.
If you leave oil in the printer, spots may appear on the first 20 to 50 pages
you print after the move.
300
Appendix E
17
Insert the shipping screw into the printer.
The screw is encased in a sheath.
Insert the sheath and turn the screw
with a coin until it is tight.
18
Close the printer’s door.
19
Repack the printer in its original packing material.
When the printer arrives at its new location, unpack it and set it up as
described in Chapter 1.
Packing and Moving the Printer
301
Appendix F
Replacing the Fuser
When the fuser is near the end of its life, the Alert light and fuser indicator
on the status panel flash to notify you. (When the fuser is completely worn
out, the printer stops working.) You can purchase a Color LaserWriter Fuser
Replacement Kit from an Apple-authorized reseller and follow the
instructions in this appendix to replace the fuser yourself. Or you may prefer
to contact an Apple-authorized service provider to replace the fuser for you.
Fuser
M
C
Bk
Y
!
Alert light
Fuser access door
Note: When you replace the fuser, you also replace the air filter, ozone
filter, the separation discharger unit, and the transfer drum cleaning unit.
All these items are included in the Color LaserWriter 12/600 PS Fuser
Replacement Kit.
303
Replacing the fuser
1
Turn off the printer and unplug it.
IMPORTANT Wait 10-15 minutes to let the fuser cool down.
2
Open the printer’s door.
3
Remove the fuser oil bottle and put it (upright) in a safe place.
IMPORTANT The fuser oil is very slippery. If it spills on the floor, use paper
towels or other absorbent material to clean it up immediately.
304
Appendix F
4
If necessary, close the face-up delivery tray.
5
Open the door to the paper pickup area.
6
Open the fuser access door.
7
Remove the tab that connects the fuser door strap to the printer.
Pull the top of the tab loose. Then slide the rest up and pull it out.
Replacing the Fuser
305
8
Remove the fuser access door.
9
With a large flat screwdriver, loosen the locking screws.
The screws do not come off.
306
Appendix F
10
To slide the fuser unit out of the printer, pull both knobs.
11
To remove the fuser, insert your hands into the pockets and lift.
IMPORTANT Don’t drop the fuser. If any oil spills, clean it up immediately.
(The oil is very slippery.)
Replacing the Fuser
307
12
Unpack the new fuser and remove all the packing materials.
13
Lower the new fuser into place in the printer.
14
Push the fuser back into the printer.
Push firmly. If the fuser isn’t all the way in, you won’t be able to tighten the
two locking screws.
308
Appendix F
15
With the screwdriver, tighten the two locking screws.
If the screws won’t tighten and lock, the fuser isn’t in far enough. Push
it firmly.
Replacing the Fuser
309
310
Appendix F
16
Reattach the fuser access door.
17
Reattach the fuser door strap.
18
Close the fuser access door and the paper pickup access door.
19
Replace the fuser oil bottle.
Close the cover.
20
Close the printer’s door.
Replacing the transfer drum cleaning unit
1
If necessary, close the multipurpose tray.
2
Open the door to the paper pickup area.
Replacing the Fuser
311
312
Appendix F
3
Pull the paper pickup unit out.
4
Remove the connector cover.
5
Unplug the cable connector.
6
Unlock the lever so you can remove the unit.
Replacing the Fuser
313
314
Appendix F
7
Slide the unit to the left, then pull it out of the printer.
8
Insert the new cleaning unit.
9
Lower the lever to a vertical position and snap it into place.
10
Plug in the cable connector.
Replacing the Fuser
315
316
Appendix F
11
Replace the connector cover.
12
Push the paper pickup unit back into the printer and close the door.
Replacing the air and ozone filters
1
Remove the cover.
2
Unlock and remove the used air filter.
To unlock it, slide the air filter in the
direction of the arrow.
Then lift it off the cover.
Replacing the Fuser
317
3
Insert the new air filter and lock it in place.
Align the slots with the tabs, then slide
the new filter in the direction of the
arrow to lock it in place.
4
318
Appendix F
Grasp the tab on the used ozone filter and remove the filter from its slot.
5
Place a new ozone filter in the slot.
6
Replace the cover over both filters.
Replacing the Fuser
319
Replacing the separation discharger unit
1
Open the printer’s door.
2
Open the top cover.
3
Remove the used separation discharge unit.
IMPORTANT Avoid getting loose toner on the density sensor window.
320
Appendix F
5
Insert the new separation discharger unit.
6
Slide the separation discharger unit to the left to lock it in place.
Replacing the Fuser
321
322
Appendix F
7
Clean the density sensor.
8
Close the top cover.
9
Close the printer’s door.
Appendix G
Diagnosing Problems for Service
This appendix shows how the status panel behaves when the printer is out of
paper, when there’s a paper jam, and when it’s time for routine maintenance.
Occasionally the printer may have a serious problem that cannot be fixed with
routine maintenance procedures. When such a problem occurs, the printer
will stop working, and the lights on the status panel will blink in patterns that
are meaningful to trained service personnel. If you take time to notice which
lights are on and report this on the telephone to an Apple-authorized service
provider, it will assist him or her in diagnosing and fixing the problem.
323
Normal power-on status panel behavior
Every time you turn on the printer, the lights on the status panel reflect the
results of diagnostic tests the printer performs on itself. When everything’s
normal, the four main lights are on at first. Then they go out, one by one, left
to right.
M
C
Bk
Y
!
Finally, the
Paper Jam light
(‘) goes out.
First, the
Ready/In use light
(U) goes out.
Second, the Alert light
(±) goes out.
Third, the Paper Out light
( «) goes out.
As soon as they all go out, the printer has passed the tests. The green
Ready/In Use light (U) blinks for about two minutes during warmup, and
then it should glow steadily.
If the status lights do not behave this way, the printer needs attention. The
rest of this appendix explains what different lights tell you about the
condition of the printer.
324
Appendix G
Paper Out and Paper Jam lights both flash
If the Paper Out and Paper Jam lights begin flashing, it indicates a hardware
failure. This is an uncommon event, but if it happens, contact your Appleauthorized service provider and report the problem. To help service personnel
diagnose the problem, give them detailed information about the behavior of
the status panel. The illustration below shows you what to report.
If the Paper Out and Paper Jam lights blink, the printer has a problem.
M
C
Bk
Y
!
Report which lights (if any)
are on in this area of the panel.
Report how many lights (if any)
are on in this area of the panel.
Two hardware problems you may be able to fix
If you’ve recently installed memory in the printer, the SIMMs may be the
source of the problem. For information about diagnosing faulty SIMMs, see
“Problem With Internal Random-Access Memory (RAM),” later in this
appendix.
If you’ve recently installed a toner cartridge, you may not have seated the
cartridge properly. For information about diagnosing this problem, see
“Problem With the Toner Carousel,” later in this appendix.
Diagnosing Problems for Service
325
Out of paper
If the printer cannot find paper, the Paper Out light glows steadily. Lights on
the small printer diagram show which paper cassette needs to be refilled.
M
C
Bk
Y
!
Paper Out light
When the Paper Out light blinks, the printer is ready for you to feed paper
manually.
For instructions on loading paper, see Chapter 9 (or the quick reference
booklet that hangs inside the printer’s door).
For information about recommended papers, see Appendix A.
326
Appendix G
Paper jams
If paper is jammed inside the printer, the Paper Jam light glows steadily.
Lights on the small printer diagram show which doors provide access to the
paper jam.
M
C
Y
!
The lights on this diagram identify
the access doors nearest the paper jam.
Paper Jam light
For instructions on clearing paper jams, see Chapter 11 (or the quick
reference booklet that hangs inside the printer’s door).
For information about recommended papers, see Appendix A.
Diagnosing Problems for Service
327
Regular maintenance
For information about ordering replacement supplies, see Appendix A.
Low toner
If a toner cartridge is low or empty, the printer keeps working but print
quality suffers.
A light indicates
which color is low.
M
C
Bk
Y
!
When toner is low, the Alert light glows
and a toner light comes on.
When you see these lights, it can mean one of two things:
m The toner powder needs to be redistributed inside the toner cartridge. For
instructions, see Chapter 10.
m The cartridge needs to be replaced. Instructions for replacing a toner
cartridge come in the package with the new cartridge.
If the light comes on in the middle of a printing job, and the output is still
satisfactory, continue printing if you wish. You won’t harm the printer by
doing so.
328
Appendix G
Low fuser oil
When the bottle containing fuser oil is nearly empty, the Alert light glows.
When the fuser oil compartment is empty, the printer stops working until you
replace the oil. For information about ordering replacement supplies, see
Appendix A.
Instructions for replacing the fuser oil come in the package with the new
bottle of fuser oil.
M
C
Bk
Y
!
When fuser oil is low, the Alert
and fuser oil lights glow.
Fuser oil
Diagnosing Problems for Service
329
Toner disposal box is full
When the toner disposal box is full, the Alert and toner disposal lights blink.
For information about ordering replacement supplies, see Appendix A.
Toner disposal box
M
C
Bk
Y
!
When the toner disposal box is full, the
Alert and toner disposal box lights blink.
Instructions for replacing the toner disposal box come in the package with the
photoconductor cartridge and two toner disposal boxes. Or you can follow the
intructions in Chapter 1 for installing a toner disposal box.
Note: Don’t throw away used toner disposal boxes. For information on how to
return the used toner disposal box to the manufacturer, see the instructions
that come in the package with the photoconductor and new toner disposal
boxes. By returning used toner disposal boxes, you help reduce waste and
preserve the environment.
330
Appendix G
Photoconductor cartridge is wearing out
When the photoconductor cartridge is near the end of its life, the Alert and
photoconductor lights glow. When the photoconductor is completely worn
out, the printer stops working until you replace the photoconductor cartridge.
For information about ordering replacement supplies, see Appendix A.
M
C
Bk
Y
!
When the photoconductor is wearing out,
the Alert and photoconductor lights glow.
Photoconductor
cartridge
Instructions for replacing the photoconductor cartridge come in the package
with the new photoconductor and two toner disposal boxes. (You use two
toner disposal boxes during the lifetime of one photoconductor cartridge.)
If the light comes on in the middle of a printing job, and the output is still
satisfactory, continue printing if you wish. You won’t harm the printer by
doing so.
Note: Don’t throw away the used photoconductor cartridge. For information
on how to return the used photoconductor to the manufacturer, see the
instructions that come with the new photoconductor. By returning the used
photoconductor cartridge, you help reduce waste and preserve the
environment.
Diagnosing Problems for Service
331
Fuser needs replacement
When the fuser is wearing out, the Alert and fuser lights glow. As the fuser
approaches the end of its life, the status panel shows a warning, prompting
you to order a replacement kit. After printing approximately 500 more pages,
when the fuser is completely worn out, the printer stops working.
For information about ordering replacement supplies, see Appendix A.
Fuser
M
C
Bk
Y
!
When the fuser is wearing out, the
Alert and fuser lights glow.
Instructions for replacing the fuser come in the package with the new fuser,
together with a transfer drum cleaning unit, a separation discharger, an ozone
filter, and an air filter.
332
Appendix G
Problem with internal random-access memory (RAM)
The printer does self-diagnostic tests each time it is turned on. During this
testing, the printer verifies the amount of memory installed. If the test
determines that a SIMM is faulty, specific status panel lights come on.
One light on means the SIMM in J11 is faulty.
Two lights means the SIMM in J10 is faulty.
Cyan toner light on
M
C
Bk
Y
!
Paper Out and Paper Jam lights blinking
If you have just installed additional RAM, open the printer and make sure the
SIMMs are fully seated in the correct sockets that match one of the supported
configurations listed in Chapter 5 (and in Appendix A). Try reinstalling the
SIMMs, following the instructions in Chapter 5.
If this does not resolve the problem, contact an Apple-authorized service
provider.
Diagnosing Problems for Service
333
Problem with the toner carousel
If you’ve just installed a toner cartridge but haven’t seated it properly in the
toner carousel, specific status panel lights come on.
Two lights on in this area
M
C
Bk
Y
!
Black toner light on
Paper Out and Paper Jam lights blinking
To fix the problem, open the printer’s door. Locate the toner cartridge you just
installed and press firmly to secure it.
If this does not resolve the problem, contact an Apple-authorized service
provider.
334
Appendix G
Appendix H Removing the Macintosh Desktop
Printing Software
IMPORTANT If you are using QuickDraw GX on your computer, you cannot
remove the desktop printer software as described in this appendix.
The printing software you installed on your Macintosh requires at least one
printer icon on your desktop and uses from 300 to 500K of your computer’s
random-access memory (RAM). If you use programs that take up large
amounts of memory, and available RAM is low, you can remove the desktop
printer software. When you remove the software, your computer uses the
original PrintMonitor supplied with your system software.
To remove the desktop printer software, follow the instructions below.
1
Quit any programs you are running.
2
While holding down the Shift key, choose Restart from the Special menu.
Hold the Shift key down until you see the “Extensions off” message on your
screen or until your normal desktop appears.
When the Macintosh desktop appears, an X appears through your desktop
printer icons.
3
Drag the desktop printer icons into the Trash.
4
Open the System Folder and find the PrintMonitor Documents folder.
5
Open the PrintMonitor Documents folder and drag to the Trash any files you find.
335
6
Close the PrintMonitor Documents folder.
7
Open the Extensions folder in the System Folder.
8
Drag the three files—Desktop Printer Extension, Desktop PrintMonitor, and Desktop
Printer Spooler—from the Extensions folder into another folder on your hard disk.
9
Choose Restart from the Special menu to restart your computer.
When you print documents now, your Macintosh uses the PrintMonitor
software. For more information about using PrintMonitor, see the next
section.
In the future, if you want to use the desktop printer software again, you can
restart your computer with the extensions off (see step 2 of these
instructions), drag the three desktop printer files (listed in step 8) into your
Extensions folder, and restart the computer.
You can also use the installation disks that came with your printer to reinstall
the desktop printer software.
336
Appendix H
Monitoring and controlling print requests without desktop printers
If you don’t have desktop printers, you must use the PrintMonitor program to
monitor and control control background printing.
1
While your document is printing, choose PrintMonitor from the Application menu at the
far right of the menu bar.
PrintMonitor is available only when
background printing is on.
If you turn off background printing,
messages on your screen keep you
informed of printing status.
2
In the PrintMonitor dialog box, review the status of documents that are printing (and
make any changes you want).
The document that’s
currently printing
appears here.
Documents that are waiting
to print are listed here.
To cancel the
current print request,
click here.
To schedule a specific time for a
document to print, click its name in
the list, then click Set Print Time.
Comments about
the status of the
document being
printed appear here.
3
When you finish, click the close box.
Removing the Macintosh Desktop Printing Software
337
Index
A
A4-size paper 25, 205, 211–213, 261
accessory and part number list 267
acoustic noise specifications 262
Adobe Type Manager (ATM).
See also fonts
changing size of the font cache 110
installing/removing Type 1 fonts,
Windows 109–110
installing, Windows 79
PostScript fonts and 279
turning on or off 110
air and ozone filters, replacing 317–319
Alert light 39, 218–222, 324, 328–332
aliases for desktop printer icons 160
ammonia-based cleaners 3, 222
Apple-authorized service provider/dealer
diagnosing problems from lights on
status panel 323
hardware failures 325
installing additional RAM 144, 149
installing an internal hard disk 140
interference with television or radio
reception xvii
print quality problems 239, 240
purchasing terminators 138
replacing the fuser 215, 218, 303
system software upgrades
44, 45, 157, 245
Apple classic fonts 289
Apple LaserWriter Software folder,
Macintosh 48, 49, 51
Apple LaserWriter Software program
group, Windows 79, 82, 99, 175
Apple Printer Utility for Windows.
See also IBM PC or compatible
computers; Windows
changing the energy-saving delay
103, 250
completing NetWare PSERVER
configuration 91
completing NetWare RPRINTER
configuration 96
configuring NetWare settings 105
configuring TCP/IP settings 106
downloading PostScript files to the
printer 108
identifying the printer location 102
installing 79, 175
job handling configuration network
option 104
naming the printer 101
opening 100
overview 99–100
preventing print job interrupts 104
printing font samples 102
quitting 100
339
restarting the printer 108
setting the printer IP address 106, 113
specifying a password for the print
server 97
turning automatic tray switching on or
off 103–104
turning startup pages on or off 102
viewing and changing communication
settings 107–108
viewing printer information 101
viewing the Ethernet address 104
Apple Printer Utility, Macintosh
changing the energy-saving delay
60, 249
configuring NetWare settings 66–67
configuring TCP/IP settings 68–69
downloading fonts to the printer
55–56
downloading PostScript files to the
printer 72
identifying printer location 54
initializing a hard disk connected to
the printer 58, 143
job-handling configuration network
option 62
naming the printer 53–54
preventing print job interrupts 62
removing fonts 57
restarting the printer 72
setting AppleTalk network zone 64
setting error timeout 63
setting printer IP address 68–69, 113
turning automatic tray switching on or
off 61
turning startup pages on or off 59
using the printer features window
51–53
using the Printer Selector window
51, 52
340
Index
viewing and changing communication
settings 70–71
viewing printer information 53
viewing the Ethernet address 65
Apple Print Monitor for Windows
79, 81–83, 175
AppleTalk (EtherTalk) network 29, 30
AppleTalk network zone.
See network zones
ATPS (AppleTalk Print Spooler)
operating mode 84, 270–275
automatic tray switching feature
Macintosh 61
Windows 103–104
automatic vs. manual printing 204
A/UX UNIX implementation 112, 119
B
B5-size paper 25, 211–213, 261
background printing 170–172, 243, 247
backup copies of printer disks 44
banner pages
NetWare and 84, 93, 109, 251
UNIX and 251
Berkeley Software Distribution (BSD),
UNIX 112, 119
configuring BSD systems 127–128
binary format, sending Windows data in
182, 187, 196
bitmapped fonts 278, 281–282
blank areas on printed pages 238–239
blotches or spots on printed pages 238
blurry print quality 242
BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol) method for
assigning an IP address to the
printer, UNIX 113, 116, 253
BSD UNIX systems, configuring
127–128
C
cable connector in paper pickup area
313, 315
cables
attaching hard drive cable to the
controller board 142
connection problems, Macintosh 246
Ethernet 30–31
HDI-30 System 137, 139
LocalTalk 32–33, 34
parallel interface 35–36
SCSI peripheral 137, 139
sheet feeder 133–134
cartridges. See toner cartridges
Chooser, Macintosh
configuring printer software for new
options 150–152
selecting the printer 47, 159
troubleshooting 245–246
turning on background printing 170
CIE color standard 292
cleaning. See also maintenance
density sensor and separation
discharger wire 223–225, 237,
238, 240
exterior of the printer 222
paper pickup rollers 226, 238
client computers, setting up for network
printing 98
CMYK color 291
color conversion using ColorSync
292–293
color density, changing 254
color documents, printing
Macintosh 166
Windows 182
color for watermarks, Windows 190
color gradients are not smooth on printed
pages 241
Color LaserWriter Fuser Replacement
Kit, purchasing 303
color-matching information,
Windows 182
color print quality problems 241–242
ColorSync 166, 291–293
Communication Configuration category
settings
Apple Printer Utility for Windows
105–108
Apple Printer Utility, Macintosh
66–71
communication settings
adjusting/customizing 40–42
Macintosh 70–71
Windows 107–108
factory default settings 266
configuration switch
changing communication settings
Macintosh 70
Windows 107
illustration 2, 29
resetting after communication was
turned off 244
resetting to standard communication
settings 41, 42
configuring specific UNIX systems
121–128
configuring the printer. See Apple Printer
Utility for Windows; Apple
Printer Utility, Macintosh;
ATPS operating mode;
TCP/IP network
Connect dialog box, Windows 197–199
connecting hard disks 137–144
connecting the printer
to a LocalTalk network 32–33
to an Ethernet network 30–32
to an IBM PC or compatible computer
35–36
to a single Macintosh 34–35
ports and 29
turning on the power 37–39
conserving energy 39. See also
energy-saving mode
controller board, removing/replacing
140–143, 145–149
controller specifications 258
Index
341
copies, specifying number to print
Macintosh 164
Windows 181
cover page, printing, Macintosh 165
Custom Installation of printer software,
Windows 79, 81, 174, 177
Custom Install of printer software,
Macintosh 46, 158
customizing communication settings 41
D
default communication settings, resetting
41, 42
default printer, changing 161
De-Install of printer software, Windows
79, 174
demonstration page, turning on or off
Macintosh 59
Windows 102
density control panel 254
density sensor, cleaning
223–225, 237, 240
desktop printer icons, Macintosh
159–161, 171, 246
desktop printer software, removing,
Macintosh 335–337
device list for Windows, adding a hard
disk to 193–194
diagnosing problems from the status
panel 323–334
dialog boxes, Macintosh
Page Setup 162–163
Print 164
Print Options 165–169
dialog boxes, Windows
NetWare Printer Connections 176
printer Connect 197–199
printer Setup 80, 175, 178–179
Features 186
Fonts 184–185
Job Control 187
Paper 180–181
PostScript 182–183, 197
Watermark 188–190
342
Index
dimensions of the printer 261
disks
backup copies of 44
write-protecting 78, 174
disposal box cover 13, 18, 296
disposing of used components
photoconductor cartridges 221, 331
toner cartridges 219
toner disposal boxes 220, 330
DOS notes for mapping to a
print queue 199
DOS/Windows computers. See Apple
Printer Utility for Windows;
IBM PC or compatible
computers; Windows
downloadable fonts 290
downloading fonts
to a hard disk 137
Macintosh 55–56
Windows 109–110, 187, 190–192
downloading PostScript files
Macintosh 72
Windows 108
E
Easy Install of printer software,
Macintosh 45–46, 157–158
Encapsulated PostScript files. See
EPS files
energy-saving mode, adjusting the idle
delay 39
Macintosh 60, 249
UNIX 252
Windows 103, 250
environmental information about the
printer 262
EPS files
printing
Macintosh 72
Windows 108, 196
saving documents as, Macintosh 164
error handler, sending with a Windows
document 187
errors, reporting printing errors,
Macintosh 167
error timeout setting, Macintosh 63
/etc/hosts UNIX file 119
/etc/printcap UNIX file 118,
119, 120
Ethernet address, viewing
Macintosh 65
Windows 104
Ethernet network
connecting to 30–32
initial TCP/IP setup for UNIX
112–118
setting up Apple Print Monitor,
Windows 82–83
Ethernet port 2, 29
communication settings for 40, 41
Ethernet transceivers 30, 31, 34
EtherTalk. See AppleTalk
Express Installation of printer software,
Windows 79, 174, 175
extensions, turning off, Macintosh
45, 156
external hard disks
connecting 137–139
downloading/removing fonts,
Macintosh 55–57
from manufacturers other than
Apple 144
not recognized 247
F
face-down and face-up output trays
2, 210, 229
faded print 237, 239
feature list of the printer 1
Features dialog box, Windows printer
Setup 186
feeder. See sheet feeder
feeder base, positioning 131–132
filters, replacing air and ozone filters
317–319
fixed-size fonts. See bitmapped fonts
Font Downloader, Windows
191–192, 193, 195
font handling
adding hard disks and 137
adding RAM and 144
fonts. See also Adobe Type Manager
(ATM)
Apple classic fonts 289
bitmapped 278, 281–282
downloadable 290
downloading
to a hard disk 137
Macintosh 55–56
Windows 109–110, 187, 190–192
examining on screen 280
installing/removing ATM Type 1
fonts, Windows 109–110
Macintosh search order 283
not all Macintosh fonts appear in the
Fonts menu 288
organizing in suitcases 285–286
PostScript
184–185, 190–192, 279, 283
preventing downloading,
Windows 187
questions and answers 288–290
QuickDraw GX font format 281
removing, Macintosh 57
resident in ROM 259–260
styled 287
substitution in printed documents
289, 290
TrueType 110, 184–185, 280–283
types to buy 288
for watermarks 189
where they are stored, Macintosh
284–286
font samples, printing
Macintosh 57
Windows 102
Fonts dialog box, Windows printer Setup
184–185
Fonts folder, Macintosh 284
Index
343
font substitution 289, 290
font suitcases 285–286
fuser
clearing paper jams from
229, 234–235
life expectancy of 260
removing 307
replacing 222, 303–311, 332
fuser access door
opening/closing 235, 305, 311
reattaching 310
removing 305–306
unpacking 7
fuser door strap 305, 310
fuser light on status panel 222, 303, 332
fuser oil
cleaning spills 304
life expectancy of 260
removing from inside the printer 300
replacing 219
fuser oil bottle
installing 10–11
removing 299, 304
replacing 311
fuser oil compartment 2, 10–11
fuser oil light on status panel 219, 329
G
grayscale documents, printing,
Macintosh 166
grounding the printer 4
grounding wrist strap 140, 141, 145, 147
344
Index
H
hard disks
adding to the Windows device list
193–194
connecting 137–144
downloading fonts to
Macintosh 56–57
Windows 191–192
font handling and network
performance with 137
initializing a hard disk connected to
the printer
Macintosh 58, 143
Windows 195
reinitializing when previously
used 137
space requirements
IBM PC or compatible 77, 173
Macintosh 44, 156
hardware requirements
IBM PC or compatible 77, 173
Macintosh 44, 156
NetWare 77
HDI-30 SCSI System cable 137, 139
hierarchical file system (HFS) format
58, 143, 195
horizontal bands appear on the printed
page 241
host access to printer, TCP/IP
configuration
Macintosh 68–69
Windows 106
HP-UX version 8.07, configuring
121–123
HP-UX version 9.xx, configuring
123–125
humidity requirements for the printer
3, 262
I
IBM AIX version 3.x, configuring
125–126
IBM PC or compatible computers.
See also Apple Printer Utility
for Windows; Windows
configuring printer software for new
options 150, 152
configuring the printer 99–110
connecting the printer to 35–36
initial Novell NetWare setup 83–98
installing printer software for
78–81, 174–176
setting printer options 178–190
system requirements 77, 173
troubleshooting 249–251
icons, Macintosh desktop printer
159–161, 171, 246
indicator lights. See status panel lights
initializing a hard disk connected to
the printer
Macintosh 58, 143
Windows 143
Installer program, Macintosh 45–46, 74,
75, 157–158
installing
additional RAM 145–149
ATM Type 1 fonts, Windows 109
external hard disks 137–139
fuser oil bottle 10–11
an internal hard disk 140–143
the optional 250-sheet feeder
130–135
the optional 250-sheet universal
cassette 136
photoconductor cartridge 12–18
the printer as an ATPS remote printer
269–275
printer software
Macintosh 44–48, 156–158
Windows 78–81, 174–176
quick reference booklet 9
SIMMs 145–149
toner cartridges, for the first time
19–24
toner disposal box 12, 17–18
Install utility for ATPS NetWare remote
printer configuration 270–275
interference with radio or television
reception xvii
internal hard disk
downloading/removing fonts 56–57
installing 140–143
International Color Consortium (ICC),
color profile standards 292
IP address of the printer, specifying
Macintosh 68–69
UNIX 112–116, 117, 119, 252–253
Windows 106
J, K
jagged edges (“jaggies”) 278, 280
jammed paper. See paper jams
Job Control dialog box, Windows printer
Setup 187
Job Defaults category settings
Apple Printer Utility for Windows
103–104
Apple Printer Utility, Macintosh
61–62
job-handling network option
Macintosh 62
Windows 104
job timeout setting, Windows 183
JPEG compressed images 166
Index
345
346
Index
L
M
landscape orientation 180
laser specifications 257
layout, specifying
Macintosh 163
Windows 181
legal-size paper 25, 242, 261
length guide on universal cassette 212
letterhead paper, loading
in the multipurpose tray 209
in the standard paper cassette 27, 205
in the universal cassette 212
life expectancy of printer and major
components 260
lights on status panel. See status panel
lights
lines on printed pages 238
LocalTalk connecting kits 32, 34
LocalTalk network, connecting to 29,
32–33
LocalTalk port 2, 29, 32, 34
communication settings for 40, 41
location of the printer
choosing 3, 189
identifying
Macintosh 54
Windows 102
locked disks 78, 156, 174
locking connectors, inserting 133
locking screws on fuser unit 306, 309
low fuser oil light on status panel
219, 329
low toner lights on status panel 218, 328
lpr or lp command, UNIX 202
Macintosh computers. See also Apple
Printer Utility, Macintosh
background printing 170–172
changing default printer 161
changing settings 49–72
configuring printer software for new
options 150–152
connecting the printer to 34–35
determining printer status 160
getting users started using the printer
73–75
installing printer software for
44–48, 74–75, 156–158
page setup options 162–163
printing documents 164–167
printing transparencies 164, 169
print quality modes 169
print queue functions 171–172
Read Me file 48
removing desktop printer software
335–337
selecting with the Chooser 47, 159
switching between printers 161–162
system requirements 44, 156
tray switching 168
troubleshooting 245–249
working with desktop printer icons
159–161, 171, 246
Macintosh hierarchical file system (HFS)
format hard disks 137, 139, 143
magnetic fields, location of printer and 3
maintenance. See also Apple-authorized
service provider/dealer; safety
instructions
precautions 216–217
recommended service interval
215, 260
replacing the air and ozone filters
317–319
replacing the fuser 303–311
replacing the separation discharger
unit 320–321
replacing the transfer drum cleaning
unit 311–316
routine procedures 218–226
Maintenance lights 39
manual vs. automatic printing 204
margin dial on optional sheet feeder 135
margins
adjusting the left margin setting for
the optional sheet feeder 135
for printable area, Windows 183
marking engine specifications 257
memory requirements. See also RAM
IBM PC or compatible 77, 173
Macintosh 44, 156
“out of memory” message,
Macintosh 247
printer 144–146
misaligned paper. See paper jams
moving desktop printer icons 160
moving the printer, preparations for
295–301
multipurpose tray
access door 2, 206–209, 211
capacity of 25, 207, 261
loading 207–211
opening 206
paper jams and 229
printer won’t draw paper from 251
switching to automatically
Macintosh 61
Windows 103–104
using transparencies 207, 210–211
using with paper cassette for same
print job 207
N
naming desktop printer icons 160
naming the printer
Macintosh 53–54, 246
PCONSOLE 88
Windows 101
NetWare
ATPS operating mode 84, 269–275
banner pages and 84, 93, 109, 251
configuring settings
Macintosh 66–67
Windows 105
connecting the printer to 29, 30
initial setup, Windows 83–98
mapping to a print queue from
DOS 199
PCONSOLE utility 86–97
problems printing spreadsheets or
graphics 251
PSERVER operating mode
84, 95, 97–91
RPRINTER operating mode
84, 92–96
selecting the queue and port assigned
to the printer, Windows 176
setting up client computers for
network printing 98
setting up the PostScript printer
driver 98
verifying the printer installation 98
NetWare Loadable Module (NLM) 269
NetWare Printer Connections dialog box,
Windows 176
network performance, adding hard disks
and 137
network printing options, job handling
Macintosh 62
Windows 104
networks. See also NetWare;
TCP/IP network
connecting the printer to 29–33
having Macintosh users install printer
software from 74–75
Index
347
network zones, Macintosh
selecting 150, 151, 159
setting 64
troubleshooting 246
Novell NetWare. See NetWare
number of copies to print, specifying
Macintosh 164
Windows 181
O
operating modes for NetWare
ATPS 84, 270–275
PSERVER 84, 87–91, 95
RPRINTER 84, 92–96
operation summary of the printer
258–259
optional 250-sheet feeder. See
sheet feeder
optional 250-sheet universal cassette.
See universal cassette
ordering replacement supplies 268
orientation, selecting
Macintosh 163
Windows 180
out of paper 326
output trays 2, 210, 229
ozone and air filters, replacing 317–319
ozone emission specifications 265
P
packing the printer to move it 295–301
Page Setup dialog box, Macintosh
162–163
page setup options, selecting
Macintosh 162–163
Windows 180–181
348
Index
paper
A4-size 25, 205, 211–213, 261
B5-size 25, 211–213, 261
choosing stock 204
legal-size 242, 261
letterhead 27, 205, 209, 212
loading into the multipurpose
tray 207–211
loading into the standard paper
cassette 25–28
loading into the universal
cassette 211–213
photocopier 25, 26
potential problems with 204
three-hole punched 27, 205, 208, 212
types and sizes supported 25,
260–261
U.S. letter-size 25, 205, 211–213, 261
paper cassette. See standard
paper cassette
Paper dialog box, Windows printer
Setup 180–181
paper-handling options, turning on or off
Macintosh 61
Windows 103–104
Paper Jam light 39, 228, 324, 327
flashing with Paper Out light
325, 333–334
paper jams
avoiding 208
diagnosing 327
locating and clearing 228–236
paper level indicator on paper cassette 28
Paper Out light 39, 324, 326
flashing with Paper Jam light
325, 333–334
paper pickup area, clearing paper jams in
229–232
paper pickup rollers, cleaning 226
paper pickup unit, pulling out of the
printer 312, 316
paper size, specifying
Macintosh 163
Windows 180
paper source, selecting
Macintosh 164
Windows 180
paper type, configuring the printer for,
Windows 186
parallel interface cable 35–36, 78
parallel port 2, 29, 36
communication settings for 40, 41
part numbers for standard and optional
parts 267
password 97
PCONSOLE NetWare utility
assigning a password for the print
server 97
basic key commands 86
creating a print queue 89–90, 94–96
setting up the printer as a print
server 87–90
setting up the printer as a remote
printer 92–96
performance
adding hard disks and 137
adding RAM and 144
photoconductor cartridge
installing 12–18
life expectancy of 260
removing when moving the
printer 298
replacing 221, 238–241, 331
toner disposal boxes and 220
photoconductor light on status
panel 221, 331
photocopier paper 25, 26
ping command, UNIX 113,
114–115, 252
plugging in the printer 37
portrait orientation 180
ports
communication settings for 40, 41
Ethernet 2, 29
LocalTalk 2, 29, 32, 34
parallel 2, 29, 36
SCSI 2, 29
specifying a different port, Windows
80, 175
PostScript Color Matching,
Macintosh 166
PostScript dialog box, Windows printer
Setup 182–183, 197
PostScript error handler, sending with a
Windows document 187
PostScript files
downloading to the printer
Macintosh 72
Windows 108
printing to, Windows 196–199
saving documents as, Macintosh 164
PostScript fonts
described 279
TrueType fonts and 283
Windows and 184, 185, 190–192
PostScript header, sending,
Windows 187
PostScript Level 2 features, setting,
Windows 182, 197
PostScript performance settings,
Windows 183
PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files
installing on a Windows NT system
81, 177
LaserWriter printers supported
263–264
PostScript printer driver
changing default options, Windows
178–190
downloading fonts, Windows 190
installing for Windows 79, 175
setting up for NetWare 98
power consumption specifications 263
Index
349
power cord receptacle 2, 37
power switch 2
precautions. See safety instructions
preview screen, Windows 181
printable area, changing settings,
Windows 183
printcap options, UNIX 117, 120
Print dialog box, Macintosh 164
printer administrator
adjusting communication
settings 40–42
configuring the printer for IBM PC or
compatible computers 99–110
getting started, Macintosh 73–75
initial TCP/IP setup for UNIX
112–118
installing hardware options 129–152
installing software, fonts, and
configuring the printer,
Macintosh 44–72
installing software for IBM PC or
compatible computers 78–83
overview of responsibilities xx-xxiii
setting up and connecting the printer
3–42
setting up the printer for a Novell
NetWare network 83–98
printer Connect dialog box, Windows
197–199
printer driver
Macintosh installation problems
245–246
settings are ignored on an IBM PC or
compatible 250
setting options, Windows 178–179
printer features window, Apple Printer
Utility, Macintosh 51–53
Printer Information category settings,
Apple Printer Utility,
Macintosh 53
350
Index
printer information, viewing
Macintosh 53
Windows 101
printer location, identifying
Macintosh 54
Windows 102
printer mode for receiving data,
Windows 187
printer output format, Windows 180
Printer Preferences category settings
Apple Printer Utility for Windows
101–103
Apple Printer Utility, Macintosh
53–60
Printer Selector window, Apple Printer
Utility, Macintosh 51, 52
printer Setup dialog box, Windows
Features settings 186
Fonts settings 184
Job Control settings 187
opening 178–179
Paper settings 180–181
PostScript settings 182–183, 197
specifying a different port 80, 175
Watermark settings 188–190
printer setup kit, installing items
from 8–24
printer software
configuring after adding memory
Macintosh 150
Windows 150, 152, 186
configuring for optional sheet
feeder 150–152
installing
Macintosh 44–48, 74–75, 156–158
Windows 78–81, 174–176
removing desktop printer software,
Macintosh 335–337
printing
to a PostScript file, Windows
196–199
from a UNIX workstation 202
automatic vs. manual 204
color and grayscale documents,
Macintosh 166
cover page, Macintosh 165
DOS notes for 199
finishing before closing the network
connection
Macintosh 62
Windows 104
font samples
Macintosh 57
Windows 102
lines stairstep off the page, UNIX 251
monitoring with PrintMonitor 337
no paper comes out of the printer
IBM-PC or compatible 249–250
Macintosh 248
“printer can’t print” message
IBM PC or compatible 249
Macintosh 248
print queue functions, Macintosh
171–172
ReadMe file, Macintosh 48
startup pages
Macintosh 59
Windows 102
switching between printers, Macintosh
161–162
test page, UNIX 118
transparencies 164, 169
troubleshooting 247–252
turning tray switching on or off
Macintosh 168
Windows 186
UNIX document generates PostScript
errors 251
using automatic tray switching
Macintosh 61
Windows 103–104
using Macintosh desktop printer icon
functions 161
watermarks, Windows 188–190
printing and transfer area, paper jams
and 229
printing errors, reporting, Macintosh 167
printing materials. See paper;
transparencies
print job interrupts, preventing
Macintosh 62
Windows 104
print jobs, Windows protocol options to
begin and end 183
PrintMonitor 335–337
Print Options dialog box, Macintosh
165–169
print quality
resolution specifications 259
troubleshooting 237–242
print quality modes
Macintosh 169
Windows 186
print queue
capturing for DOS printing 199
creating using NetWare 89–90, 94–96
monitoring and controlling on a
Macintosh 171–172
sending UNIX documents to 201
print requests, monitoring and controlling
171–172, 337
print server
assigning a password for 97
NetWare network setting
Macintosh 67
Windows 105
setting up the printer as in NetWare
87–90
protocol options to begin and end
Windows print jobs 183
PSERVER operating mode, NetWare
84, 87–91, 95, 105
Index
351
Q
queue. See print queue
QuickDraw GX, removing desktop
printer software and 335
QuickDraw GX font format 281
quick reference booklet, storing 2, 9
R
radio or television reception, interference
with xvii
RAM. See also memory requirements
configuring printer software after
adding
Macintosh 150
Windows 150, 152, 186
downloading fonts to, Windows
191–192
downloading/removing fonts,
Macintosh 56–57
faulty SIMM indicator on status
panel 149, 333
installing SIMMs 145–149
“out of memory” message,
Macintosh 247
performance improvements after
adding 144, 242
possible configurations 146
printer requirements 144–146
upgrade specifications 265
RAM expansion kits 145
RARP (Remote Address Resolution
Protocol) method for assigning
an IP address to the printer,
UNIX 113, 116, 253
352
Index
Read Me file, Macintosh 48
README.TXT file, Windows
79, 174
Ready/In Use light 39, 324
reinitializing a previously used
hard disk 137
Remote Line Printer Daemon (lpd)
protocol, UNIX 112, 119
remote printer
NetWare network setting
Macintosh 66
Windows 105
setting up the printer as
ATPS 270–275
NetWare 92–96
UNIX 117–118
removing
desktop printer software, Macintosh
335–337
fonts, Macintosh 57
SIMMs 148
renaming desktop printer icons 160
reorder numbers for Apple printer
supplies 268
reporting method for Macintosh printing
errors 167
resolution specifications 259
restarting the Macintosh 46, 158
restarting the printer
Macintosh 72
Windows 108
retaining clips on connector 148
RGB color 291
rotated landscape orientation 180
RPRINTER operating mode, NetWare
84, 92–96, 105
S
safety instructions. See also Appleauthorized service provider;
maintenance
cleaning interior parts of the printer
223–226
cleaning the exterior of the
printer 222
cleaning up spilled fuser oil 304
conditions that warrant disconnecting
the printer 4
fuser oil spills 11
general precautions 5, 217
grounding wrist strap
140, 141, 145, 147
handling the photoconductor 12
installing additional RAM
145, 147, 148
installing an internal hard disk
140, 141
laser information xviii
lifting the printer 130, 132
moving the printer 295–301
preventing damage to the
printer drum 27
preventing paper jams 27
removing fuser oil from inside the
printer 300
removing the controller board
140, 141
unpacking the printer 6
working in the fuser area 216–217
saving documents as PostScript or EPS
files, Macintosh 164
saving energy 39. See also
energy-saving mode
scaling, specifying, Windows 181
screen fonts. See bitmapped fonts
SCSI ID number, setting 138
SCSI peripheral cable 137, 139
SCSI port 2, 29, 139
SCSI terminators 137, 138, 139, 144
SCSI voltage 138
security, limiting printer access to hosts
Macintosh 68–69
Windows 106
separation discharger unit, replacing
320–321
separation discharger wire, cleaning
40, 223–225, 238, 240
server. See also networks
installing printer software from,
Macintosh 74–75
servicing the printer.
See Apple-authorized service
provider/dealer; maintenance;
safety instructions
Setup dialog box. See printer Setup
dialog box, Windows
sheet feeder
clearing paper jams 229, 236
configuring printer software for
Macintosh 150–152
Windows 150, 152, 186
installing 130–135
shipping screw 8, 301
SIMMs
faulty indicators 149, 333
inserting 145, 148–149
upgrade specifications 265
Single Inline Memory Modules.
See SIMMs
size (dimensions) of the printer 261
size guide on universal cassette 213
slots on controller board for inserting
SIMMs 145, 148
software requirements
Macintosh 44, 156
NetWare 77
Windows/DOS 77, 173
space requirements of the printer 262
Index
353
specifications
acoustic noise 262
controller 258
environmental 262
laser 257
life expectancy of components 260
marking engine 257
ozone emissions 265
paper 260–261
power consumption 263
print resolution 259
RAM (SIMM) upgrades 265
wait time 262
speed of printer 260
spool directory in UNIX, privileges for
118, 121
spots or blotches on printed pages 238
stains on a printed page 240
standard paper cassette
avoiding paper jams 208
capacity of 25, 26, 205, 261
clearing paper jams 229, 232, 236
illustration 2, 205
loading 25–28, 205
unpacking 7
using transparencies 204
using with multipurpose tray for same
print job 207
startup pages
checking 38, 150
turning on or off
Macintosh 59
Windows 102
static discharge, preventing 141, 145
status of printer, determining 160
status panel lights
Alert 39, 218–222, 324, 328–332
diagnosing problems from 323–334
faulty SIMM 149, 333
fuser 222, 303, 332
illustration 39
low fuser oil 219, 329
low toner 218, 328
Paper Jam 39, 228, 324, 327
354
Index
Paper Jam/Paper Out flash together
325, 333–334
Paper Out 39, 324, 326
photoconductor cartridge 221, 331
Ready/In Use 39, 324
toner carousel problem 334
toner disposal box 220, 330
styled fonts 287
subnet mask, TCP/IP configuration
Macintosh 68–69
Windows 106
suitcases for fonts 285–286
Sun OS version 4.1, configuring
127–128
supplies, reorder numbers for 268
system requirements
IBM PC or compatible 77, 173
Macintosh 44, 156
T
TCP/IP network
changing configurations
Macintosh 68–69
Windows 106
connecting to 29, 30
initial UNIX setup 112–118
printing from UNIX 202
technical specifications of the printer
257–262
television or radio reception, interference
with xvii
temperature requirements for the printer
3, 262
terminators, SCSI 137, 138, 139, 144
test page, printing in UNIX 118
three-hole punched paper
loading into the multipurpose
tray 208
loading into the paper cassette
27, 205
loading into the universal cassette 212
throwing away desktop printer icons 160
timeout settings, Windows 183
toner cartridge carousel
illustration 2, 19–24
rotating 21
seated improperly 334
won’t turn 245
toner cartridges
installing 19–24
life expectancy of 260
redistributing the toner powder
219, 237
removing when moving the
printer 295
when to replace
218–219, 237–239, 241, 328
toner disposal box
illustration 2
installing 12, 17–18
removing when moving the printer
296–297
replacing when full 220, 330
toner disposal box light on status panel
220, 330
toner flakes off the printed page 240
toner lights on status panel 39, 218, 328
toner powder, distributing 22, 219, 237
top cover access door, illustration 2
transceivers, Ethernet 30, 31, 34
transfer drum
clearing paper jams from 233–234
life expectancy of 260
transfer drum cleaning unit,
removing/replacing 311–316
transfer drum lever 12, 18, 233, 296
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Protocol. See TCP/IP network
transparencies
loading into the multipurpose tray
25, 207, 210–211
printing
automatic vs. manual 204
Macintosh 164, 169
Windows 181, 186
types to use 210, 261
tray switching, turning on or off
Macintosh 168
Windows 186
troubleshooting
background printing 243, 247
banner pages, UNIX 251
blank areas, blotches, or spots on
printed pages 238–239, 240
blurry or faded print 237, 239, 242
BOOTP or RARP server doesn’t
respond, UNIX 253
cable connections, Macintosh 246
can’t communicate with the
printer 244
can’t ping the printer by IP name or
IP address, UNIX 252
changing color density 254
Chooser problems, Macintosh
245–246
color print quality problems 241–242
document doesn’t print, Macintosh 48
document generates PostScript errors,
UNIX 251
“drop-outs” appear on legal-size
paper 242
external hard disk isn’t recognized,
Macintosh 247
flakes of toner come off the printed
page 240
fonts questions and answers 288–290
hardware options don’t appear in Print
dialog box, Macintosh 247
horizontal bands appear on the printed
page 241
interpreting lights on the status panel
149, 218–222, 323–334
lines stairstep off the page, UNIX 251
network zone selection,
Macintosh 246
no paper comes out of the printer
IBM PC or compatible 249–250
Macintosh 248
“out of memory” message,
Macintosh 247
Index
355
paper problems 204
PostScript errors generated by UNIX
documents 251
“printer can’t print” message
IBM PC or compatible 249
Macintosh 248
printer door won’t close 244
printer driver installation problems,
Macintosh 245–246
printer driver settings are ignored,
IBM PC or compatible 250
printer naming problems,
Macintosh 246
printer won’t draw paper from the
multipurpose tray, IBM PC or
compatible 251
printing spreadsheets or graphics
using Novell NetWare, IBM PC
or compatible 251
printing the first page takes a
long time
IBM PC or compatible 250
Macintosh 249
UNIX 252
print quality problems 237–242
toner cartridge carousel knob doesn’t
turn 20, 245
vertical lines on printed pages 238
working with desktop printer icons,
Macintosh 246
TrueType fonts
Adobe Type Manager (ATM) and
110, 282, 283
creating or substituting PostScript
fonts for, Windows 184–185
described 280
working with other types of fonts
281–283
turning on or off
Adobe Type Manager (ATM) 110
automatic tray switching
Macintosh 61
Windows 103–104
356
Index
background printing, Macintosh 170
demonstration page
Macintosh 59
Windows 102
extensions, Macintosh 45, 156
paper-handling options
Macintosh 61
Windows 103–104
the printer 37–38
250-sheet feeder. See sheet feeder
250-sheet universal cassette. See
universal cassette
Type 1 fonts 109–110, 184, 190–191
Type 3 fonts 184
Type 42 fonts 184
U
Ultrix version 4.2, configuring 127–128
U.S. letter-size paper 25, 205,
211–213, 261
universal cassette
clearing paper jams 229, 232
installing 136
loading 211–213
removing 131
types and sizes of paper
supported 25, 261
UNIX
assigning an IP address to the printer
113–116, 117, 119
getting users started using the printer
119–120
HP-UX version 8.07, configuring
121–123
HP-UX version 9.xx, configuring
123–125
IBM AIX version 3.x, configuring
125–126
initial TCP/IP setup 112–118
lpr or lp command 202
printing from 202
setting up the printer as a remote
printer 117–118
Sun OS version 4.1, Ultrix version
4.2, other BSD systems,
configuring 127–128
troubleshooting 251–253
unpacking
the optional 250-sheet feeder 130
the optional 250-sheet universal
cassette 136
the printer 6–8
V
ventilation requirements for the printer 3
vertical lines on printed pages 238
virus-detection programs, installing
printer software and, Macintosh
45, 46, 75, 156, 158
voltage requirements 263
W, X, Y
wait timeout setting, Windows 183
wait time specifications 262
Watermark dialog box, Windows printer
Setup 188–190
watermarks, selecting and editing,
Windows 181, 188–190
weight of printer 3, 6, 262
white gaps between colors on printed
pages 241
width guides, adjusting
on multipurpose tray 207, 208,
209, 211
on universal cassette 211
Windows. See also Apple Printer Utility
for Windows; IBM PC or
compatible computers;
Windows NT
adding a hard disk to the device list
193–194
configuring printer software for new
options 150, 152
downloading fonts 109–110, 190–192
Features settings, printer Setup 186
Fonts settings, printer Setup 184
initializing a hard disk connected to
the printer 195
installing printer software
78–81, 174–176
Job Control settings,
printer Setup 187
Paper settings, printer Setup 180–181
PostScript settings, printer Setup
182–183, 197
printer Setup dialog box, opening
178–179
printing from 178
printing to a PostScript file 196–199
printing transparencies 181, 186
specifying a different port 80, 175
tray switching 186
Watermark settings, printer Setup
188–190
Windows/DOS computers. See Apple
Printer Utility for Windows;
IBM PC or compatible
computers; Windows
Windows NT
installing the PostScript Printer
Description file for 81, 177
printing from 178
Windows Program Manager
79, 174–175
write-protecting disks 78, 174
Z
zones. See network zones
Index
357
The Apple Publishing System
This Apple manual was written, edited, and produced on a desktop publishing system using
Apple Macintosh computers and QuarkXPress. Technical illustrations were drawn in Adobe™
Illustrator; screen shots were created and modified with system software, ExposurePro, Aldus
SuperPaint, and Adobe Photoshop. Proof pages were created on Apple LaserWriter printers.
Final pages were output directly to separated film on a PostScript™-driven imagesetter.
Text type is Times®, display type is Helvetica® Narrow, and cover type is Apple Garamond,
Apple’s corporate font. Ornaments are custom symbols designed for Apple Computer.
PostScript, the LaserWriter page-description language, was developed by Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
Download PDF

advertising